1 |
24 |
jeremybenn |
This is standards.info, produced by makeinfo version 4.8 from
|
2 |
|
|
.././etc/standards.texi.
|
3 |
|
|
|
4 |
|
|
INFO-DIR-SECTION GNU organization
|
5 |
|
|
START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
|
6 |
|
|
* Standards: (standards). GNU coding standards.
|
7 |
|
|
END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
|
8 |
|
|
|
9 |
|
|
The GNU coding standards, last updated July 22, 2007.
|
10 |
|
|
|
11 |
|
|
Copyright (C) 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
|
12 |
|
|
2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
|
13 |
|
|
|
14 |
|
|
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
|
15 |
|
|
under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.2 or
|
16 |
|
|
any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no
|
17 |
|
|
Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no Back-Cover
|
18 |
|
|
Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled "GNU
|
19 |
|
|
Free Documentation License".
|
20 |
|
|
|
21 |
|
|
|
22 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Top, Next: Preface, Prev: (dir), Up: (dir)
|
23 |
|
|
|
24 |
|
|
Version
|
25 |
|
|
*******
|
26 |
|
|
|
27 |
|
|
The GNU coding standards, last updated July 22, 2007.
|
28 |
|
|
|
29 |
|
|
Copyright (C) 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
|
30 |
|
|
2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
|
31 |
|
|
|
32 |
|
|
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
|
33 |
|
|
under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.2 or
|
34 |
|
|
any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no
|
35 |
|
|
Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no Back-Cover
|
36 |
|
|
Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled "GNU
|
37 |
|
|
Free Documentation License".
|
38 |
|
|
|
39 |
|
|
* Menu:
|
40 |
|
|
|
41 |
|
|
* Preface:: About the GNU Coding Standards.
|
42 |
|
|
* Legal Issues:: Keeping free software free.
|
43 |
|
|
* Design Advice:: General program design.
|
44 |
|
|
* Program Behavior:: Program behavior for all programs
|
45 |
|
|
* Writing C:: Making the best use of C.
|
46 |
|
|
* Documentation:: Documenting programs.
|
47 |
|
|
* Managing Releases:: The release process.
|
48 |
|
|
* References:: Mentioning non-free software or documentation.
|
49 |
|
|
* GNU Free Documentation License:: Copying and sharing this manual.
|
50 |
|
|
* Index::
|
51 |
|
|
|
52 |
|
|
|
53 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Preface, Next: Legal Issues, Prev: Top, Up: Top
|
54 |
|
|
|
55 |
|
|
1 About the GNU Coding Standards
|
56 |
|
|
********************************
|
57 |
|
|
|
58 |
|
|
The GNU Coding Standards were written by Richard Stallman and other GNU
|
59 |
|
|
Project volunteers. Their purpose is to make the GNU system clean,
|
60 |
|
|
consistent, and easy to install. This document can also be read as a
|
61 |
|
|
guide to writing portable, robust and reliable programs. It focuses on
|
62 |
|
|
programs written in C, but many of the rules and principles are useful
|
63 |
|
|
even if you write in another programming language. The rules often
|
64 |
|
|
state reasons for writing in a certain way.
|
65 |
|
|
|
66 |
|
|
This release of the GNU Coding Standards was last updated July 22,
|
67 |
|
|
2007.
|
68 |
|
|
|
69 |
|
|
If you did not obtain this file directly from the GNU project and
|
70 |
|
|
recently, please check for a newer version. You can get the GNU Coding
|
71 |
|
|
Standards from the GNU web server in many different formats, including
|
72 |
|
|
the Texinfo source, PDF, HTML, DVI, plain text, and more, at:
|
73 |
|
|
`http://www.gnu.org/prep/standards/'.
|
74 |
|
|
|
75 |
|
|
Corrections or suggestions for this document should be sent to
|
76 |
|
|
. If you make a suggestion, please include a
|
77 |
|
|
suggested new wording for it; our time is limited. We prefer a context
|
78 |
|
|
diff to the `standards.texi' or `make-stds.texi' files, but if you
|
79 |
|
|
don't have those files, please mail your suggestion anyway.
|
80 |
|
|
|
81 |
|
|
These standards cover the minimum of what is important when writing a
|
82 |
|
|
GNU package. Likely, the need for additional standards will come up.
|
83 |
|
|
Sometimes, you might suggest that such standards be added to this
|
84 |
|
|
document. If you think your standards would be generally useful, please
|
85 |
|
|
do suggest them.
|
86 |
|
|
|
87 |
|
|
You should also set standards for your package on many questions not
|
88 |
|
|
addressed or not firmly specified here. The most important point is to
|
89 |
|
|
be self-consistent--try to stick to the conventions you pick, and try
|
90 |
|
|
to document them as much as possible. That way, your program will be
|
91 |
|
|
more maintainable by others.
|
92 |
|
|
|
93 |
|
|
The GNU Hello program serves as an example of how to follow the GNU
|
94 |
|
|
coding standards for a trivial program.
|
95 |
|
|
`http://www.gnu.org/software/hello/hello.html'.
|
96 |
|
|
|
97 |
|
|
|
98 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Legal Issues, Next: Design Advice, Prev: Preface, Up: Top
|
99 |
|
|
|
100 |
|
|
2 Keeping Free Software Free
|
101 |
|
|
****************************
|
102 |
|
|
|
103 |
|
|
This chapter discusses how you can make sure that GNU software avoids
|
104 |
|
|
legal difficulties, and other related issues.
|
105 |
|
|
|
106 |
|
|
* Menu:
|
107 |
|
|
|
108 |
|
|
* Reading Non-Free Code:: Referring to proprietary programs.
|
109 |
|
|
* Contributions:: Accepting contributions.
|
110 |
|
|
* Trademarks:: How we deal with trademark issues.
|
111 |
|
|
|
112 |
|
|
|
113 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Reading Non-Free Code, Next: Contributions, Up: Legal Issues
|
114 |
|
|
|
115 |
|
|
2.1 Referring to Proprietary Programs
|
116 |
|
|
=====================================
|
117 |
|
|
|
118 |
|
|
Don't in any circumstances refer to Unix source code for or during your
|
119 |
|
|
work on GNU! (Or to any other proprietary programs.)
|
120 |
|
|
|
121 |
|
|
If you have a vague recollection of the internals of a Unix program,
|
122 |
|
|
this does not absolutely mean you can't write an imitation of it, but
|
123 |
|
|
do try to organize the imitation internally along different lines,
|
124 |
|
|
because this is likely to make the details of the Unix version
|
125 |
|
|
irrelevant and dissimilar to your results.
|
126 |
|
|
|
127 |
|
|
For example, Unix utilities were generally optimized to minimize
|
128 |
|
|
memory use; if you go for speed instead, your program will be very
|
129 |
|
|
different. You could keep the entire input file in memory and scan it
|
130 |
|
|
there instead of using stdio. Use a smarter algorithm discovered more
|
131 |
|
|
recently than the Unix program. Eliminate use of temporary files. Do
|
132 |
|
|
it in one pass instead of two (we did this in the assembler).
|
133 |
|
|
|
134 |
|
|
Or, on the contrary, emphasize simplicity instead of speed. For some
|
135 |
|
|
applications, the speed of today's computers makes simpler algorithms
|
136 |
|
|
adequate.
|
137 |
|
|
|
138 |
|
|
Or go for generality. For example, Unix programs often have static
|
139 |
|
|
tables or fixed-size strings, which make for arbitrary limits; use
|
140 |
|
|
dynamic allocation instead. Make sure your program handles NULs and
|
141 |
|
|
other funny characters in the input files. Add a programming language
|
142 |
|
|
for extensibility and write part of the program in that language.
|
143 |
|
|
|
144 |
|
|
Or turn some parts of the program into independently usable
|
145 |
|
|
libraries. Or use a simple garbage collector instead of tracking
|
146 |
|
|
precisely when to free memory, or use a new GNU facility such as
|
147 |
|
|
obstacks.
|
148 |
|
|
|
149 |
|
|
|
150 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Contributions, Next: Trademarks, Prev: Reading Non-Free Code, Up: Legal Issues
|
151 |
|
|
|
152 |
|
|
2.2 Accepting Contributions
|
153 |
|
|
===========================
|
154 |
|
|
|
155 |
|
|
If the program you are working on is copyrighted by the Free Software
|
156 |
|
|
Foundation, then when someone else sends you a piece of code to add to
|
157 |
|
|
the program, we need legal papers to use it--just as we asked you to
|
158 |
|
|
sign papers initially. _Each_ person who makes a nontrivial
|
159 |
|
|
contribution to a program must sign some sort of legal papers in order
|
160 |
|
|
for us to have clear title to the program; the main author alone is not
|
161 |
|
|
enough.
|
162 |
|
|
|
163 |
|
|
So, before adding in any contributions from other people, please tell
|
164 |
|
|
us, so we can arrange to get the papers. Then wait until we tell you
|
165 |
|
|
that we have received the signed papers, before you actually use the
|
166 |
|
|
contribution.
|
167 |
|
|
|
168 |
|
|
This applies both before you release the program and afterward. If
|
169 |
|
|
you receive diffs to fix a bug, and they make significant changes, we
|
170 |
|
|
need legal papers for that change.
|
171 |
|
|
|
172 |
|
|
This also applies to comments and documentation files. For copyright
|
173 |
|
|
law, comments and code are just text. Copyright applies to all kinds of
|
174 |
|
|
text, so we need legal papers for all kinds.
|
175 |
|
|
|
176 |
|
|
We know it is frustrating to ask for legal papers; it's frustrating
|
177 |
|
|
for us as well. But if you don't wait, you are going out on a limb--for
|
178 |
|
|
example, what if the contributor's employer won't sign a disclaimer?
|
179 |
|
|
You might have to take that code out again!
|
180 |
|
|
|
181 |
|
|
You don't need papers for changes of a few lines here or there, since
|
182 |
|
|
they are not significant for copyright purposes. Also, you don't need
|
183 |
|
|
papers if all you get from the suggestion is some ideas, not actual code
|
184 |
|
|
which you use. For example, if someone sent you one implementation, but
|
185 |
|
|
you write a different implementation of the same idea, you don't need to
|
186 |
|
|
get papers.
|
187 |
|
|
|
188 |
|
|
The very worst thing is if you forget to tell us about the other
|
189 |
|
|
contributor. We could be very embarrassed in court some day as a
|
190 |
|
|
result.
|
191 |
|
|
|
192 |
|
|
We have more detailed advice for maintainers of programs; if you have
|
193 |
|
|
reached the stage of actually maintaining a program for GNU (whether
|
194 |
|
|
released or not), please ask us for a copy. It is also available
|
195 |
|
|
online for your perusal: `http://www.gnu.org/prep/maintain/'.
|
196 |
|
|
|
197 |
|
|
|
198 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Trademarks, Prev: Contributions, Up: Legal Issues
|
199 |
|
|
|
200 |
|
|
2.3 Trademarks
|
201 |
|
|
==============
|
202 |
|
|
|
203 |
|
|
Please do not include any trademark acknowledgements in GNU software
|
204 |
|
|
packages or documentation.
|
205 |
|
|
|
206 |
|
|
Trademark acknowledgements are the statements that such-and-such is a
|
207 |
|
|
trademark of so-and-so. The GNU Project has no objection to the basic
|
208 |
|
|
idea of trademarks, but these acknowledgements feel like kowtowing, and
|
209 |
|
|
there is no legal requirement for them, so we don't use them.
|
210 |
|
|
|
211 |
|
|
What is legally required, as regards other people's trademarks, is to
|
212 |
|
|
avoid using them in ways which a reader might reasonably understand as
|
213 |
|
|
naming or labeling our own programs or activities. For example, since
|
214 |
|
|
"Objective C" is (or at least was) a trademark, we made sure to say
|
215 |
|
|
that we provide a "compiler for the Objective C language" rather than
|
216 |
|
|
an "Objective C compiler". The latter would have been meant as a
|
217 |
|
|
shorter way of saying the former, but it does not explicitly state the
|
218 |
|
|
relationship, so it could be misinterpreted as using "Objective C" as a
|
219 |
|
|
label for the compiler rather than for the language.
|
220 |
|
|
|
221 |
|
|
Please don't use "win" as an abbreviation for Microsoft Windows in
|
222 |
|
|
GNU software or documentation. In hacker terminology, calling
|
223 |
|
|
something a "win" is a form of praise. If you wish to praise Microsoft
|
224 |
|
|
Windows when speaking on your own, by all means do so, but not in GNU
|
225 |
|
|
software. Usually we write the name "Windows" in full, but when
|
226 |
|
|
brevity is very important (as in file names and sometimes symbol
|
227 |
|
|
names), we abbreviate it to "w". For instance, the files and functions
|
228 |
|
|
in Emacs that deal with Windows start with `w32'.
|
229 |
|
|
|
230 |
|
|
|
231 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Design Advice, Next: Program Behavior, Prev: Legal Issues, Up: Top
|
232 |
|
|
|
233 |
|
|
3 General Program Design
|
234 |
|
|
************************
|
235 |
|
|
|
236 |
|
|
This chapter discusses some of the issues you should take into account
|
237 |
|
|
when designing your program.
|
238 |
|
|
|
239 |
|
|
* Menu:
|
240 |
|
|
|
241 |
|
|
* Source Language:: Which languages to use.
|
242 |
|
|
* Compatibility:: Compatibility with other implementations.
|
243 |
|
|
* Using Extensions:: Using non-standard features.
|
244 |
|
|
* Standard C:: Using standard C features.
|
245 |
|
|
* Conditional Compilation:: Compiling code only if a conditional is true.
|
246 |
|
|
|
247 |
|
|
|
248 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Source Language, Next: Compatibility, Up: Design Advice
|
249 |
|
|
|
250 |
|
|
3.1 Which Languages to Use
|
251 |
|
|
==========================
|
252 |
|
|
|
253 |
|
|
When you want to use a language that gets compiled and runs at high
|
254 |
|
|
speed, the best language to use is C. Using another language is like
|
255 |
|
|
using a non-standard feature: it will cause trouble for users. Even if
|
256 |
|
|
GCC supports the other language, users may find it inconvenient to have
|
257 |
|
|
to install the compiler for that other language in order to build your
|
258 |
|
|
program. For example, if you write your program in C++, people will
|
259 |
|
|
have to install the GNU C++ compiler in order to compile your program.
|
260 |
|
|
|
261 |
|
|
C has one other advantage over C++ and other compiled languages: more
|
262 |
|
|
people know C, so more people will find it easy to read and modify the
|
263 |
|
|
program if it is written in C.
|
264 |
|
|
|
265 |
|
|
So in general it is much better to use C, rather than the comparable
|
266 |
|
|
alternatives.
|
267 |
|
|
|
268 |
|
|
But there are two exceptions to that conclusion:
|
269 |
|
|
|
270 |
|
|
* It is no problem to use another language to write a tool
|
271 |
|
|
specifically intended for use with that language. That is because
|
272 |
|
|
the only people who want to build the tool will be those who have
|
273 |
|
|
installed the other language anyway.
|
274 |
|
|
|
275 |
|
|
* If an application is of interest only to a narrow part of the
|
276 |
|
|
community, then the question of which language it is written in
|
277 |
|
|
has less effect on other people, so you may as well please
|
278 |
|
|
yourself.
|
279 |
|
|
|
280 |
|
|
Many programs are designed to be extensible: they include an
|
281 |
|
|
interpreter for a language that is higher level than C. Often much of
|
282 |
|
|
the program is written in that language, too. The Emacs editor
|
283 |
|
|
pioneered this technique.
|
284 |
|
|
|
285 |
|
|
The standard extensibility interpreter for GNU software is GUILE
|
286 |
|
|
(`http://www.gnu.org/software/guile/'), which implements the language
|
287 |
|
|
Scheme (an especially clean and simple dialect of Lisp). We don't
|
288 |
|
|
reject programs written in other "scripting languages" such as Perl and
|
289 |
|
|
Python, but using GUILE is very important for the overall consistency
|
290 |
|
|
of the GNU system.
|
291 |
|
|
|
292 |
|
|
|
293 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Compatibility, Next: Using Extensions, Prev: Source Language, Up: Design Advice
|
294 |
|
|
|
295 |
|
|
3.2 Compatibility with Other Implementations
|
296 |
|
|
============================================
|
297 |
|
|
|
298 |
|
|
With occasional exceptions, utility programs and libraries for GNU
|
299 |
|
|
should be upward compatible with those in Berkeley Unix, and upward
|
300 |
|
|
compatible with Standard C if Standard C specifies their behavior, and
|
301 |
|
|
upward compatible with POSIX if POSIX specifies their behavior.
|
302 |
|
|
|
303 |
|
|
When these standards conflict, it is useful to offer compatibility
|
304 |
|
|
modes for each of them.
|
305 |
|
|
|
306 |
|
|
Standard C and POSIX prohibit many kinds of extensions. Feel free
|
307 |
|
|
to make the extensions anyway, and include a `--ansi', `--posix', or
|
308 |
|
|
`--compatible' option to turn them off. However, if the extension has
|
309 |
|
|
a significant chance of breaking any real programs or scripts, then it
|
310 |
|
|
is not really upward compatible. So you should try to redesign its
|
311 |
|
|
interface to make it upward compatible.
|
312 |
|
|
|
313 |
|
|
Many GNU programs suppress extensions that conflict with POSIX if the
|
314 |
|
|
environment variable `POSIXLY_CORRECT' is defined (even if it is
|
315 |
|
|
defined with a null value). Please make your program recognize this
|
316 |
|
|
variable if appropriate.
|
317 |
|
|
|
318 |
|
|
When a feature is used only by users (not by programs or command
|
319 |
|
|
files), and it is done poorly in Unix, feel free to replace it
|
320 |
|
|
completely with something totally different and better. (For example,
|
321 |
|
|
`vi' is replaced with Emacs.) But it is nice to offer a compatible
|
322 |
|
|
feature as well. (There is a free `vi' clone, so we offer it.)
|
323 |
|
|
|
324 |
|
|
Additional useful features are welcome regardless of whether there
|
325 |
|
|
is any precedent for them.
|
326 |
|
|
|
327 |
|
|
|
328 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Using Extensions, Next: Standard C, Prev: Compatibility, Up: Design Advice
|
329 |
|
|
|
330 |
|
|
3.3 Using Non-standard Features
|
331 |
|
|
===============================
|
332 |
|
|
|
333 |
|
|
Many GNU facilities that already exist support a number of convenient
|
334 |
|
|
extensions over the comparable Unix facilities. Whether to use these
|
335 |
|
|
extensions in implementing your program is a difficult question.
|
336 |
|
|
|
337 |
|
|
On the one hand, using the extensions can make a cleaner program.
|
338 |
|
|
On the other hand, people will not be able to build the program unless
|
339 |
|
|
the other GNU tools are available. This might cause the program to
|
340 |
|
|
work on fewer kinds of machines.
|
341 |
|
|
|
342 |
|
|
With some extensions, it might be easy to provide both alternatives.
|
343 |
|
|
For example, you can define functions with a "keyword" `INLINE' and
|
344 |
|
|
define that as a macro to expand into either `inline' or nothing,
|
345 |
|
|
depending on the compiler.
|
346 |
|
|
|
347 |
|
|
In general, perhaps it is best not to use the extensions if you can
|
348 |
|
|
straightforwardly do without them, but to use the extensions if they
|
349 |
|
|
are a big improvement.
|
350 |
|
|
|
351 |
|
|
An exception to this rule are the large, established programs (such
|
352 |
|
|
as Emacs) which run on a great variety of systems. Using GNU
|
353 |
|
|
extensions in such programs would make many users unhappy, so we don't
|
354 |
|
|
do that.
|
355 |
|
|
|
356 |
|
|
Another exception is for programs that are used as part of
|
357 |
|
|
compilation: anything that must be compiled with other compilers in
|
358 |
|
|
order to bootstrap the GNU compilation facilities. If these require
|
359 |
|
|
the GNU compiler, then no one can compile them without having them
|
360 |
|
|
installed already. That would be extremely troublesome in certain
|
361 |
|
|
cases.
|
362 |
|
|
|
363 |
|
|
|
364 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Standard C, Next: Conditional Compilation, Prev: Using Extensions, Up: Design Advice
|
365 |
|
|
|
366 |
|
|
3.4 Standard C and Pre-Standard C
|
367 |
|
|
=================================
|
368 |
|
|
|
369 |
|
|
1989 Standard C is widespread enough now that it is ok to use its
|
370 |
|
|
features in new programs. There is one exception: do not ever use the
|
371 |
|
|
"trigraph" feature of Standard C.
|
372 |
|
|
|
373 |
|
|
1999 Standard C is not widespread yet, so please do not require its
|
374 |
|
|
features in programs. It is ok to use its features if they are present.
|
375 |
|
|
|
376 |
|
|
However, it is easy to support pre-standard compilers in most
|
377 |
|
|
programs, so if you know how to do that, feel free. If a program you
|
378 |
|
|
are maintaining has such support, you should try to keep it working.
|
379 |
|
|
|
380 |
|
|
To support pre-standard C, instead of writing function definitions in
|
381 |
|
|
standard prototype form,
|
382 |
|
|
|
383 |
|
|
int
|
384 |
|
|
foo (int x, int y)
|
385 |
|
|
...
|
386 |
|
|
|
387 |
|
|
write the definition in pre-standard style like this,
|
388 |
|
|
|
389 |
|
|
int
|
390 |
|
|
foo (x, y)
|
391 |
|
|
int x, y;
|
392 |
|
|
...
|
393 |
|
|
|
394 |
|
|
and use a separate declaration to specify the argument prototype:
|
395 |
|
|
|
396 |
|
|
int foo (int, int);
|
397 |
|
|
|
398 |
|
|
You need such a declaration anyway, in a header file, to get the
|
399 |
|
|
benefit of prototypes in all the files where the function is called.
|
400 |
|
|
And once you have the declaration, you normally lose nothing by writing
|
401 |
|
|
the function definition in the pre-standard style.
|
402 |
|
|
|
403 |
|
|
This technique does not work for integer types narrower than `int'.
|
404 |
|
|
If you think of an argument as being of a type narrower than `int',
|
405 |
|
|
declare it as `int' instead.
|
406 |
|
|
|
407 |
|
|
There are a few special cases where this technique is hard to use.
|
408 |
|
|
For example, if a function argument needs to hold the system type
|
409 |
|
|
`dev_t', you run into trouble, because `dev_t' is shorter than `int' on
|
410 |
|
|
some machines; but you cannot use `int' instead, because `dev_t' is
|
411 |
|
|
wider than `int' on some machines. There is no type you can safely use
|
412 |
|
|
on all machines in a non-standard definition. The only way to support
|
413 |
|
|
non-standard C and pass such an argument is to check the width of
|
414 |
|
|
`dev_t' using Autoconf and choose the argument type accordingly. This
|
415 |
|
|
may not be worth the trouble.
|
416 |
|
|
|
417 |
|
|
In order to support pre-standard compilers that do not recognize
|
418 |
|
|
prototypes, you may want to use a preprocessor macro like this:
|
419 |
|
|
|
420 |
|
|
/* Declare the prototype for a general external function. */
|
421 |
|
|
#if defined (__STDC__) || defined (WINDOWSNT)
|
422 |
|
|
#define P_(proto) proto
|
423 |
|
|
#else
|
424 |
|
|
#define P_(proto) ()
|
425 |
|
|
#endif
|
426 |
|
|
|
427 |
|
|
|
428 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Conditional Compilation, Prev: Standard C, Up: Design Advice
|
429 |
|
|
|
430 |
|
|
3.5 Conditional Compilation
|
431 |
|
|
===========================
|
432 |
|
|
|
433 |
|
|
When supporting configuration options already known when building your
|
434 |
|
|
program we prefer using `if (... )' over conditional compilation, as in
|
435 |
|
|
the former case the compiler is able to perform more extensive checking
|
436 |
|
|
of all possible code paths.
|
437 |
|
|
|
438 |
|
|
For example, please write
|
439 |
|
|
|
440 |
|
|
if (HAS_FOO)
|
441 |
|
|
...
|
442 |
|
|
else
|
443 |
|
|
...
|
444 |
|
|
|
445 |
|
|
instead of:
|
446 |
|
|
|
447 |
|
|
#ifdef HAS_FOO
|
448 |
|
|
...
|
449 |
|
|
#else
|
450 |
|
|
...
|
451 |
|
|
#endif
|
452 |
|
|
|
453 |
|
|
A modern compiler such as GCC will generate exactly the same code in
|
454 |
|
|
both cases, and we have been using similar techniques with good success
|
455 |
|
|
in several projects. Of course, the former method assumes that
|
456 |
|
|
`HAS_FOO' is defined as either 0 or 1.
|
457 |
|
|
|
458 |
|
|
While this is not a silver bullet solving all portability problems,
|
459 |
|
|
and is not always appropriate, following this policy would have saved
|
460 |
|
|
GCC developers many hours, or even days, per year.
|
461 |
|
|
|
462 |
|
|
In the case of function-like macros like `REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE' in GCC
|
463 |
|
|
which cannot be simply used in `if( ...)' statements, there is an easy
|
464 |
|
|
workaround. Simply introduce another macro `HAS_REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE' as
|
465 |
|
|
in the following example:
|
466 |
|
|
|
467 |
|
|
#ifdef REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE
|
468 |
|
|
#define HAS_REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE 1
|
469 |
|
|
#else
|
470 |
|
|
#define HAS_REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE 0
|
471 |
|
|
#endif
|
472 |
|
|
|
473 |
|
|
|
474 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Program Behavior, Next: Writing C, Prev: Design Advice, Up: Top
|
475 |
|
|
|
476 |
|
|
4 Program Behavior for All Programs
|
477 |
|
|
***********************************
|
478 |
|
|
|
479 |
|
|
This chapter describes conventions for writing robust software. It
|
480 |
|
|
also describes general standards for error messages, the command line
|
481 |
|
|
interface, and how libraries should behave.
|
482 |
|
|
|
483 |
|
|
* Menu:
|
484 |
|
|
|
485 |
|
|
* Non-GNU Standards:: We consider standards such as POSIX;
|
486 |
|
|
we don't "obey" them.
|
487 |
|
|
* Semantics:: Writing robust programs.
|
488 |
|
|
* Libraries:: Library behavior.
|
489 |
|
|
* Errors:: Formatting error messages.
|
490 |
|
|
* User Interfaces:: Standards about interfaces generally.
|
491 |
|
|
* Graphical Interfaces:: Standards for graphical interfaces.
|
492 |
|
|
* Command-Line Interfaces:: Standards for command line interfaces.
|
493 |
|
|
* Option Table:: Table of long options.
|
494 |
|
|
* Memory Usage:: When and how to care about memory needs.
|
495 |
|
|
* File Usage:: Which files to use, and where.
|
496 |
|
|
|
497 |
|
|
|
498 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Non-GNU Standards, Next: Semantics, Up: Program Behavior
|
499 |
|
|
|
500 |
|
|
4.1 Non-GNU Standards
|
501 |
|
|
=====================
|
502 |
|
|
|
503 |
|
|
The GNU Project regards standards published by other organizations as
|
504 |
|
|
suggestions, not orders. We consider those standards, but we do not
|
505 |
|
|
"obey" them. In developing a GNU program, you should implement an
|
506 |
|
|
outside standard's specifications when that makes the GNU system better
|
507 |
|
|
overall in an objective sense. When it doesn't, you shouldn't.
|
508 |
|
|
|
509 |
|
|
In most cases, following published standards is convenient for
|
510 |
|
|
users--it means that their programs or scripts will work more portably.
|
511 |
|
|
For instance, GCC implements nearly all the features of Standard C as
|
512 |
|
|
specified by that standard. C program developers would be unhappy if
|
513 |
|
|
it did not. And GNU utilities mostly follow specifications of POSIX.2;
|
514 |
|
|
shell script writers and users would be unhappy if our programs were
|
515 |
|
|
incompatible.
|
516 |
|
|
|
517 |
|
|
But we do not follow either of these specifications rigidly, and
|
518 |
|
|
there are specific points on which we decided not to follow them, so as
|
519 |
|
|
to make the GNU system better for users.
|
520 |
|
|
|
521 |
|
|
For instance, Standard C says that nearly all extensions to C are
|
522 |
|
|
prohibited. How silly! GCC implements many extensions, some of which
|
523 |
|
|
were later adopted as part of the standard. If you want these
|
524 |
|
|
constructs to give an error message as "required" by the standard, you
|
525 |
|
|
must specify `--pedantic', which was implemented only so that we can
|
526 |
|
|
say "GCC is a 100% implementation of the standard," not because there
|
527 |
|
|
is any reason to actually use it.
|
528 |
|
|
|
529 |
|
|
POSIX.2 specifies that `df' and `du' must output sizes by default in
|
530 |
|
|
units of 512 bytes. What users want is units of 1k, so that is what we
|
531 |
|
|
do by default. If you want the ridiculous behavior "required" by
|
532 |
|
|
POSIX, you must set the environment variable `POSIXLY_CORRECT' (which
|
533 |
|
|
was originally going to be named `POSIX_ME_HARDER').
|
534 |
|
|
|
535 |
|
|
GNU utilities also depart from the letter of the POSIX.2
|
536 |
|
|
specification when they support long-named command-line options, and
|
537 |
|
|
intermixing options with ordinary arguments. This minor
|
538 |
|
|
incompatibility with POSIX is never a problem in practice, and it is
|
539 |
|
|
very useful.
|
540 |
|
|
|
541 |
|
|
In particular, don't reject a new feature, or remove an old one,
|
542 |
|
|
merely because a standard says it is "forbidden" or "deprecated."
|
543 |
|
|
|
544 |
|
|
|
545 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Semantics, Next: Libraries, Prev: Non-GNU Standards, Up: Program Behavior
|
546 |
|
|
|
547 |
|
|
4.2 Writing Robust Programs
|
548 |
|
|
===========================
|
549 |
|
|
|
550 |
|
|
Avoid arbitrary limits on the length or number of _any_ data structure,
|
551 |
|
|
including file names, lines, files, and symbols, by allocating all data
|
552 |
|
|
structures dynamically. In most Unix utilities, "long lines are
|
553 |
|
|
silently truncated". This is not acceptable in a GNU utility.
|
554 |
|
|
|
555 |
|
|
Utilities reading files should not drop NUL characters, or any other
|
556 |
|
|
nonprinting characters _including those with codes above 0177_. The
|
557 |
|
|
only sensible exceptions would be utilities specifically intended for
|
558 |
|
|
interface to certain types of terminals or printers that can't handle
|
559 |
|
|
those characters. Whenever possible, try to make programs work
|
560 |
|
|
properly with sequences of bytes that represent multibyte characters,
|
561 |
|
|
using encodings such as UTF-8 and others.
|
562 |
|
|
|
563 |
|
|
Check every system call for an error return, unless you know you
|
564 |
|
|
wish to ignore errors. Include the system error text (from `perror' or
|
565 |
|
|
equivalent) in _every_ error message resulting from a failing system
|
566 |
|
|
call, as well as the name of the file if any and the name of the
|
567 |
|
|
utility. Just "cannot open foo.c" or "stat failed" is not sufficient.
|
568 |
|
|
|
569 |
|
|
Check every call to `malloc' or `realloc' to see if it returned
|
570 |
|
|
zero. Check `realloc' even if you are making the block smaller; in a
|
571 |
|
|
system that rounds block sizes to a power of 2, `realloc' may get a
|
572 |
|
|
different block if you ask for less space.
|
573 |
|
|
|
574 |
|
|
In Unix, `realloc' can destroy the storage block if it returns zero.
|
575 |
|
|
GNU `realloc' does not have this bug: if it fails, the original block
|
576 |
|
|
is unchanged. Feel free to assume the bug is fixed. If you wish to
|
577 |
|
|
run your program on Unix, and wish to avoid lossage in this case, you
|
578 |
|
|
can use the GNU `malloc'.
|
579 |
|
|
|
580 |
|
|
You must expect `free' to alter the contents of the block that was
|
581 |
|
|
freed. Anything you want to fetch from the block, you must fetch before
|
582 |
|
|
calling `free'.
|
583 |
|
|
|
584 |
|
|
If `malloc' fails in a noninteractive program, make that a fatal
|
585 |
|
|
error. In an interactive program (one that reads commands from the
|
586 |
|
|
user), it is better to abort the command and return to the command
|
587 |
|
|
reader loop. This allows the user to kill other processes to free up
|
588 |
|
|
virtual memory, and then try the command again.
|
589 |
|
|
|
590 |
|
|
Use `getopt_long' to decode arguments, unless the argument syntax
|
591 |
|
|
makes this unreasonable.
|
592 |
|
|
|
593 |
|
|
When static storage is to be written in during program execution, use
|
594 |
|
|
explicit C code to initialize it. Reserve C initialized declarations
|
595 |
|
|
for data that will not be changed.
|
596 |
|
|
|
597 |
|
|
Try to avoid low-level interfaces to obscure Unix data structures
|
598 |
|
|
(such as file directories, utmp, or the layout of kernel memory), since
|
599 |
|
|
these are less likely to work compatibly. If you need to find all the
|
600 |
|
|
files in a directory, use `readdir' or some other high-level interface.
|
601 |
|
|
These are supported compatibly by GNU.
|
602 |
|
|
|
603 |
|
|
The preferred signal handling facilities are the BSD variant of
|
604 |
|
|
`signal', and the POSIX `sigaction' function; the alternative USG
|
605 |
|
|
`signal' interface is an inferior design.
|
606 |
|
|
|
607 |
|
|
Nowadays, using the POSIX signal functions may be the easiest way to
|
608 |
|
|
make a program portable. If you use `signal', then on GNU/Linux
|
609 |
|
|
systems running GNU libc version 1, you should include `bsd/signal.h'
|
610 |
|
|
instead of `signal.h', so as to get BSD behavior. It is up to you
|
611 |
|
|
whether to support systems where `signal' has only the USG behavior, or
|
612 |
|
|
give up on them.
|
613 |
|
|
|
614 |
|
|
In error checks that detect "impossible" conditions, just abort.
|
615 |
|
|
There is usually no point in printing any message. These checks
|
616 |
|
|
indicate the existence of bugs. Whoever wants to fix the bugs will have
|
617 |
|
|
to read the source code and run a debugger. So explain the problem with
|
618 |
|
|
comments in the source. The relevant data will be in variables, which
|
619 |
|
|
are easy to examine with the debugger, so there is no point moving them
|
620 |
|
|
elsewhere.
|
621 |
|
|
|
622 |
|
|
Do not use a count of errors as the exit status for a program.
|
623 |
|
|
_That does not work_, because exit status values are limited to 8 bits
|
624 |
|
|
(0 through 255). A single run of the program might have 256 errors; if
|
625 |
|
|
you try to return 256 as the exit status, the parent process will see 0
|
626 |
|
|
as the status, and it will appear that the program succeeded.
|
627 |
|
|
|
628 |
|
|
If you make temporary files, check the `TMPDIR' environment
|
629 |
|
|
variable; if that variable is defined, use the specified directory
|
630 |
|
|
instead of `/tmp'.
|
631 |
|
|
|
632 |
|
|
In addition, be aware that there is a possible security problem when
|
633 |
|
|
creating temporary files in world-writable directories. In C, you can
|
634 |
|
|
avoid this problem by creating temporary files in this manner:
|
635 |
|
|
|
636 |
|
|
fd = open(filename, O_WRONLY | O_CREAT | O_EXCL, 0600);
|
637 |
|
|
|
638 |
|
|
or by using the `mkstemps' function from libiberty.
|
639 |
|
|
|
640 |
|
|
In bash, use `set -C' to avoid this problem.
|
641 |
|
|
|
642 |
|
|
|
643 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Libraries, Next: Errors, Prev: Semantics, Up: Program Behavior
|
644 |
|
|
|
645 |
|
|
4.3 Library Behavior
|
646 |
|
|
====================
|
647 |
|
|
|
648 |
|
|
Try to make library functions reentrant. If they need to do dynamic
|
649 |
|
|
storage allocation, at least try to avoid any nonreentrancy aside from
|
650 |
|
|
that of `malloc' itself.
|
651 |
|
|
|
652 |
|
|
Here are certain name conventions for libraries, to avoid name
|
653 |
|
|
conflicts.
|
654 |
|
|
|
655 |
|
|
Choose a name prefix for the library, more than two characters long.
|
656 |
|
|
All external function and variable names should start with this prefix.
|
657 |
|
|
In addition, there should only be one of these in any given library
|
658 |
|
|
member. This usually means putting each one in a separate source file.
|
659 |
|
|
|
660 |
|
|
An exception can be made when two external symbols are always used
|
661 |
|
|
together, so that no reasonable program could use one without the
|
662 |
|
|
other; then they can both go in the same file.
|
663 |
|
|
|
664 |
|
|
External symbols that are not documented entry points for the user
|
665 |
|
|
should have names beginning with `_'. The `_' should be followed by
|
666 |
|
|
the chosen name prefix for the library, to prevent collisions with
|
667 |
|
|
other libraries. These can go in the same files with user entry points
|
668 |
|
|
if you like.
|
669 |
|
|
|
670 |
|
|
Static functions and variables can be used as you like and need not
|
671 |
|
|
fit any naming convention.
|
672 |
|
|
|
673 |
|
|
|
674 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Errors, Next: User Interfaces, Prev: Libraries, Up: Program Behavior
|
675 |
|
|
|
676 |
|
|
4.4 Formatting Error Messages
|
677 |
|
|
=============================
|
678 |
|
|
|
679 |
|
|
Error messages from compilers should look like this:
|
680 |
|
|
|
681 |
|
|
SOURCE-FILE-NAME:LINENO: MESSAGE
|
682 |
|
|
|
683 |
|
|
If you want to mention the column number, use one of these formats:
|
684 |
|
|
|
685 |
|
|
SOURCE-FILE-NAME:LINENO:COLUMN: MESSAGE
|
686 |
|
|
SOURCE-FILE-NAME:LINENO.COLUMN: MESSAGE
|
687 |
|
|
|
688 |
|
|
Line numbers should start from 1 at the beginning of the file, and
|
689 |
|
|
column numbers should start from 1 at the beginning of the line. (Both
|
690 |
|
|
of these conventions are chosen for compatibility.) Calculate column
|
691 |
|
|
numbers assuming that space and all ASCII printing characters have
|
692 |
|
|
equal width, and assuming tab stops every 8 columns.
|
693 |
|
|
|
694 |
|
|
The error message can also give both the starting and ending
|
695 |
|
|
positions of the erroneous text. There are several formats so that you
|
696 |
|
|
can avoid redundant information such as a duplicate line number. Here
|
697 |
|
|
are the possible formats:
|
698 |
|
|
|
699 |
|
|
SOURCE-FILE-NAME:LINENO-1.COLUMN-1-LINENO-2.COLUMN-2: MESSAGE
|
700 |
|
|
SOURCE-FILE-NAME:LINENO-1.COLUMN-1-COLUMN-2: MESSAGE
|
701 |
|
|
SOURCE-FILE-NAME:LINENO-1-LINENO-2: MESSAGE
|
702 |
|
|
|
703 |
|
|
When an error is spread over several files, you can use this format:
|
704 |
|
|
|
705 |
|
|
FILE-1:LINENO-1.COLUMN-1-FILE-2:LINENO-2.COLUMN-2: MESSAGE
|
706 |
|
|
|
707 |
|
|
Error messages from other noninteractive programs should look like
|
708 |
|
|
this:
|
709 |
|
|
|
710 |
|
|
PROGRAM:SOURCE-FILE-NAME:LINENO: MESSAGE
|
711 |
|
|
|
712 |
|
|
when there is an appropriate source file, or like this:
|
713 |
|
|
|
714 |
|
|
PROGRAM: MESSAGE
|
715 |
|
|
|
716 |
|
|
when there is no relevant source file.
|
717 |
|
|
|
718 |
|
|
If you want to mention the column number, use this format:
|
719 |
|
|
|
720 |
|
|
PROGRAM:SOURCE-FILE-NAME:LINENO:COLUMN: MESSAGE
|
721 |
|
|
|
722 |
|
|
In an interactive program (one that is reading commands from a
|
723 |
|
|
terminal), it is better not to include the program name in an error
|
724 |
|
|
message. The place to indicate which program is running is in the
|
725 |
|
|
prompt or with the screen layout. (When the same program runs with
|
726 |
|
|
input from a source other than a terminal, it is not interactive and
|
727 |
|
|
would do best to print error messages using the noninteractive style.)
|
728 |
|
|
|
729 |
|
|
The string MESSAGE should not begin with a capital letter when it
|
730 |
|
|
follows a program name and/or file name, because that isn't the
|
731 |
|
|
beginning of a sentence. (The sentence conceptually starts at the
|
732 |
|
|
beginning of the line.) Also, it should not end with a period.
|
733 |
|
|
|
734 |
|
|
Error messages from interactive programs, and other messages such as
|
735 |
|
|
usage messages, should start with a capital letter. But they should not
|
736 |
|
|
end with a period.
|
737 |
|
|
|
738 |
|
|
|
739 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: User Interfaces, Next: Graphical Interfaces, Prev: Errors, Up: Program Behavior
|
740 |
|
|
|
741 |
|
|
4.5 Standards for Interfaces Generally
|
742 |
|
|
======================================
|
743 |
|
|
|
744 |
|
|
Please don't make the behavior of a utility depend on the name used to
|
745 |
|
|
invoke it. It is useful sometimes to make a link to a utility with a
|
746 |
|
|
different name, and that should not change what it does.
|
747 |
|
|
|
748 |
|
|
Instead, use a run time option or a compilation switch or both to
|
749 |
|
|
select among the alternate behaviors.
|
750 |
|
|
|
751 |
|
|
Likewise, please don't make the behavior of the program depend on the
|
752 |
|
|
type of output device it is used with. Device independence is an
|
753 |
|
|
important principle of the system's design; do not compromise it merely
|
754 |
|
|
to save someone from typing an option now and then. (Variation in error
|
755 |
|
|
message syntax when using a terminal is ok, because that is a side issue
|
756 |
|
|
that people do not depend on.)
|
757 |
|
|
|
758 |
|
|
If you think one behavior is most useful when the output is to a
|
759 |
|
|
terminal, and another is most useful when the output is a file or a
|
760 |
|
|
pipe, then it is usually best to make the default behavior the one that
|
761 |
|
|
is useful with output to a terminal, and have an option for the other
|
762 |
|
|
behavior.
|
763 |
|
|
|
764 |
|
|
Compatibility requires certain programs to depend on the type of
|
765 |
|
|
output device. It would be disastrous if `ls' or `sh' did not do so in
|
766 |
|
|
the way all users expect. In some of these cases, we supplement the
|
767 |
|
|
program with a preferred alternate version that does not depend on the
|
768 |
|
|
output device type. For example, we provide a `dir' program much like
|
769 |
|
|
`ls' except that its default output format is always multi-column
|
770 |
|
|
format.
|
771 |
|
|
|
772 |
|
|
|
773 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Graphical Interfaces, Next: Command-Line Interfaces, Prev: User Interfaces, Up: Program Behavior
|
774 |
|
|
|
775 |
|
|
4.6 Standards for Graphical Interfaces
|
776 |
|
|
======================================
|
777 |
|
|
|
778 |
|
|
When you write a program that provides a graphical user interface,
|
779 |
|
|
please make it work with X Windows and the GTK+ toolkit unless the
|
780 |
|
|
functionality specifically requires some alternative (for example,
|
781 |
|
|
"displaying jpeg images while in console mode").
|
782 |
|
|
|
783 |
|
|
In addition, please provide a command-line interface to control the
|
784 |
|
|
functionality. (In many cases, the graphical user interface can be a
|
785 |
|
|
separate program which invokes the command-line program.) This is so
|
786 |
|
|
that the same jobs can be done from scripts.
|
787 |
|
|
|
788 |
|
|
Please also consider providing a CORBA interface (for use from
|
789 |
|
|
GNOME), a library interface (for use from C), and perhaps a
|
790 |
|
|
keyboard-driven console interface (for use by users from console mode).
|
791 |
|
|
Once you are doing the work to provide the functionality and the
|
792 |
|
|
graphical interface, these won't be much extra work.
|
793 |
|
|
|
794 |
|
|
|
795 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Command-Line Interfaces, Next: Option Table, Prev: Graphical Interfaces, Up: Program Behavior
|
796 |
|
|
|
797 |
|
|
4.7 Standards for Command Line Interfaces
|
798 |
|
|
=========================================
|
799 |
|
|
|
800 |
|
|
It is a good idea to follow the POSIX guidelines for the command-line
|
801 |
|
|
options of a program. The easiest way to do this is to use `getopt' to
|
802 |
|
|
parse them. Note that the GNU version of `getopt' will normally permit
|
803 |
|
|
options anywhere among the arguments unless the special argument `--'
|
804 |
|
|
is used. This is not what POSIX specifies; it is a GNU extension.
|
805 |
|
|
|
806 |
|
|
Please define long-named options that are equivalent to the
|
807 |
|
|
single-letter Unix-style options. We hope to make GNU more user
|
808 |
|
|
friendly this way. This is easy to do with the GNU function
|
809 |
|
|
`getopt_long'.
|
810 |
|
|
|
811 |
|
|
One of the advantages of long-named options is that they can be
|
812 |
|
|
consistent from program to program. For example, users should be able
|
813 |
|
|
to expect the "verbose" option of any GNU program which has one, to be
|
814 |
|
|
spelled precisely `--verbose'. To achieve this uniformity, look at the
|
815 |
|
|
table of common long-option names when you choose the option names for
|
816 |
|
|
your program (*note Option Table::).
|
817 |
|
|
|
818 |
|
|
It is usually a good idea for file names given as ordinary arguments
|
819 |
|
|
to be input files only; any output files would be specified using
|
820 |
|
|
options (preferably `-o' or `--output'). Even if you allow an output
|
821 |
|
|
file name as an ordinary argument for compatibility, try to provide an
|
822 |
|
|
option as another way to specify it. This will lead to more consistency
|
823 |
|
|
among GNU utilities, and fewer idiosyncrasies for users to remember.
|
824 |
|
|
|
825 |
|
|
All programs should support two standard options: `--version' and
|
826 |
|
|
`--help'. CGI programs should accept these as command-line options,
|
827 |
|
|
and also if given as the `PATH_INFO'; for instance, visiting
|
828 |
|
|
`http://example.org/p.cgi/--help' in a browser should output the same
|
829 |
|
|
information as invoking `p.cgi --help' from the command line.
|
830 |
|
|
|
831 |
|
|
* Menu:
|
832 |
|
|
|
833 |
|
|
* --version:: The standard output for --version.
|
834 |
|
|
* --help:: The standard output for --help.
|
835 |
|
|
|
836 |
|
|
|
837 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: --version, Next: --help, Up: Command-Line Interfaces
|
838 |
|
|
|
839 |
|
|
4.7.1 `--version'
|
840 |
|
|
-----------------
|
841 |
|
|
|
842 |
|
|
The standard `--version' option should direct the program to print
|
843 |
|
|
information about its name, version, origin and legal status, all on
|
844 |
|
|
standard output, and then exit successfully. Other options and
|
845 |
|
|
arguments should be ignored once this is seen, and the program should
|
846 |
|
|
not perform its normal function.
|
847 |
|
|
|
848 |
|
|
The first line is meant to be easy for a program to parse; the
|
849 |
|
|
version number proper starts after the last space. In addition, it
|
850 |
|
|
contains the canonical name for this program, in this format:
|
851 |
|
|
|
852 |
|
|
GNU Emacs 19.30
|
853 |
|
|
|
854 |
|
|
The program's name should be a constant string; _don't_ compute it from
|
855 |
|
|
`argv[0]'. The idea is to state the standard or canonical name for the
|
856 |
|
|
program, not its file name. There are other ways to find out the
|
857 |
|
|
precise file name where a command is found in `PATH'.
|
858 |
|
|
|
859 |
|
|
If the program is a subsidiary part of a larger package, mention the
|
860 |
|
|
package name in parentheses, like this:
|
861 |
|
|
|
862 |
|
|
emacsserver (GNU Emacs) 19.30
|
863 |
|
|
|
864 |
|
|
If the package has a version number which is different from this
|
865 |
|
|
program's version number, you can mention the package version number
|
866 |
|
|
just before the close-parenthesis.
|
867 |
|
|
|
868 |
|
|
If you _need_ to mention the version numbers of libraries which are
|
869 |
|
|
distributed separately from the package which contains this program,
|
870 |
|
|
you can do so by printing an additional line of version info for each
|
871 |
|
|
library you want to mention. Use the same format for these lines as for
|
872 |
|
|
the first line.
|
873 |
|
|
|
874 |
|
|
Please do not mention all of the libraries that the program uses
|
875 |
|
|
"just for completeness"--that would produce a lot of unhelpful clutter.
|
876 |
|
|
Please mention library version numbers only if you find in practice that
|
877 |
|
|
they are very important to you in debugging.
|
878 |
|
|
|
879 |
|
|
The following line, after the version number line or lines, should
|
880 |
|
|
be a copyright notice. If more than one copyright notice is called
|
881 |
|
|
for, put each on a separate line.
|
882 |
|
|
|
883 |
|
|
Next should follow a line stating the license, preferably using one
|
884 |
|
|
of abbrevations below, and a brief statement that the program is free
|
885 |
|
|
software, and that users are free to copy and change it. Also mention
|
886 |
|
|
that there is no warranty, to the extent permitted by law. See
|
887 |
|
|
recommended wording below.
|
888 |
|
|
|
889 |
|
|
It is ok to finish the output with a list of the major authors of the
|
890 |
|
|
program, as a way of giving credit.
|
891 |
|
|
|
892 |
|
|
Here's an example of output that follows these rules:
|
893 |
|
|
|
894 |
|
|
GNU hello 2.3
|
895 |
|
|
Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
|
896 |
|
|
License GPLv3+: GNU GPL version 3 or later
|
897 |
|
|
This is free software: you are free to change and redistribute it.
|
898 |
|
|
There is NO WARRANTY, to the extent permitted by law.
|
899 |
|
|
|
900 |
|
|
You should adapt this to your program, of course, filling in the
|
901 |
|
|
proper year, copyright holder, name of program, and the references to
|
902 |
|
|
distribution terms, and changing the rest of the wording as necessary.
|
903 |
|
|
|
904 |
|
|
This copyright notice only needs to mention the most recent year in
|
905 |
|
|
which changes were made--there's no need to list the years for previous
|
906 |
|
|
versions' changes. You don't have to mention the name of the program in
|
907 |
|
|
these notices, if that is inconvenient, since it appeared in the first
|
908 |
|
|
line. (The rules are different for copyright notices in source files;
|
909 |
|
|
*note Copyright Notices: (maintain)Copyright Notices.)
|
910 |
|
|
|
911 |
|
|
Translations of the above lines must preserve the validity of the
|
912 |
|
|
copyright notices (*note Internationalization::). If the translation's
|
913 |
|
|
character set supports it, the `(C)' should be replaced with the
|
914 |
|
|
copyright symbol, as follows:
|
915 |
|
|
|
916 |
|
|
(the official copyright symbol, which is the letter C in a circle);
|
917 |
|
|
|
918 |
|
|
Write the word "Copyright" exactly like that, in English. Do not
|
919 |
|
|
translate it into another language. International treaties recognize
|
920 |
|
|
the English word "Copyright"; translations into other languages do not
|
921 |
|
|
have legal significance.
|
922 |
|
|
|
923 |
|
|
Finally, here is the table of our suggested license abbreviations.
|
924 |
|
|
Any abbreviation can be followed by `vVERSION[+]', meaning that
|
925 |
|
|
particular version, or later versions with the `+', as shown above.
|
926 |
|
|
|
927 |
|
|
In the case of exceptions for extra permissions with the GPL, we use
|
928 |
|
|
`/' for a separator; the version number can follow the license
|
929 |
|
|
abbreviation as usual, as in the examples below.
|
930 |
|
|
|
931 |
|
|
GPL
|
932 |
|
|
GNU General Public License, `http://www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl.html'.
|
933 |
|
|
|
934 |
|
|
LGPL
|
935 |
|
|
GNU Lesser General Public License,
|
936 |
|
|
`http://www.gnu.org/licenses/lgpl.html'.
|
937 |
|
|
|
938 |
|
|
GPL/Guile
|
939 |
|
|
GNU GPL with the exception for Guile; for example, GPLv3+/Guile
|
940 |
|
|
means the GNU GPL version 3 or later, with the extra exception for
|
941 |
|
|
Guile.
|
942 |
|
|
|
943 |
|
|
GNU GPL with the exception for Ada.
|
944 |
|
|
|
945 |
|
|
Apache
|
946 |
|
|
The Apache Software Foundation license,
|
947 |
|
|
`http://www.apache.org/licenses'.
|
948 |
|
|
|
949 |
|
|
Artistic
|
950 |
|
|
The Artistic license used for Perl,
|
951 |
|
|
`http://www.perlfoundation.org/legal'.
|
952 |
|
|
|
953 |
|
|
Expat
|
954 |
|
|
The Expat license, `http://www.jclark.com/xml/copying.txt'.
|
955 |
|
|
|
956 |
|
|
MPL
|
957 |
|
|
The Mozilla Public License, `http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/'.
|
958 |
|
|
|
959 |
|
|
OBSD
|
960 |
|
|
The original (4-clause) BSD license, incompatible with the GNU GPL
|
961 |
|
|
`http://www.xfree86.org/3.3.6/COPYRIGHT2.html#6'.
|
962 |
|
|
|
963 |
|
|
PHP
|
964 |
|
|
The license used for PHP, `http://www.php.net/license/'.
|
965 |
|
|
|
966 |
|
|
public domain
|
967 |
|
|
The non-license that is being in the public domain,
|
968 |
|
|
`http://www.gnu.org/licenses/license-list.html#PublicDomain'.
|
969 |
|
|
|
970 |
|
|
Python
|
971 |
|
|
The license for Python, `http://www.python.org/2.0.1/license.html'.
|
972 |
|
|
|
973 |
|
|
RBSD
|
974 |
|
|
The revised (3-clause) BSD, compatible with the GNU GPL,
|
975 |
|
|
`http://www.xfree86.org/3.3.6/COPYRIGHT2.html#5'.
|
976 |
|
|
|
977 |
|
|
X11
|
978 |
|
|
The simple non-copyleft license used for most versions of the X
|
979 |
|
|
Window system, `http://www.xfree86.org/3.3.6/COPYRIGHT2.html#3'.
|
980 |
|
|
|
981 |
|
|
Zlib
|
982 |
|
|
The license for Zlib, `http://www.gzip.org/zlib/zlib_license.html'.
|
983 |
|
|
|
984 |
|
|
|
985 |
|
|
More information about these licenses and many more are on the GNU
|
986 |
|
|
licensing web pages, `http://www.gnu.org/licenses/license-list.html'.
|
987 |
|
|
|
988 |
|
|
|
989 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: --help, Prev: --version, Up: Command-Line Interfaces
|
990 |
|
|
|
991 |
|
|
4.7.2 `--help'
|
992 |
|
|
--------------
|
993 |
|
|
|
994 |
|
|
The standard `--help' option should output brief documentation for how
|
995 |
|
|
to invoke the program, on standard output, then exit successfully.
|
996 |
|
|
Other options and arguments should be ignored once this is seen, and
|
997 |
|
|
the program should not perform its normal function.
|
998 |
|
|
|
999 |
|
|
Near the end of the `--help' option's output there should be a line
|
1000 |
|
|
that says where to mail bug reports. It should have this format:
|
1001 |
|
|
|
1002 |
|
|
Report bugs to MAILING-ADDRESS.
|
1003 |
|
|
|
1004 |
|
|
|
1005 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Option Table, Next: Memory Usage, Prev: Command-Line Interfaces, Up: Program Behavior
|
1006 |
|
|
|
1007 |
|
|
4.8 Table of Long Options
|
1008 |
|
|
=========================
|
1009 |
|
|
|
1010 |
|
|
Here is a table of long options used by GNU programs. It is surely
|
1011 |
|
|
incomplete, but we aim to list all the options that a new program might
|
1012 |
|
|
want to be compatible with. If you use names not already in the table,
|
1013 |
|
|
please send a list of them, with their
|
1014 |
|
|
meanings, so we can update the table.
|
1015 |
|
|
|
1016 |
|
|
`after-date'
|
1017 |
|
|
`-N' in `tar'.
|
1018 |
|
|
|
1019 |
|
|
`all'
|
1020 |
|
|
`-a' in `du', `ls', `nm', `stty', `uname', and `unexpand'.
|
1021 |
|
|
|
1022 |
|
|
`all-text'
|
1023 |
|
|
`-a' in `diff'.
|
1024 |
|
|
|
1025 |
|
|
`almost-all'
|
1026 |
|
|
`-A' in `ls'.
|
1027 |
|
|
|
1028 |
|
|
`append'
|
1029 |
|
|
`-a' in `etags', `tee', `time'; `-r' in `tar'.
|
1030 |
|
|
|
1031 |
|
|
`archive'
|
1032 |
|
|
`-a' in `cp'.
|
1033 |
|
|
|
1034 |
|
|
`archive-name'
|
1035 |
|
|
`-n' in `shar'.
|
1036 |
|
|
|
1037 |
|
|
`arglength'
|
1038 |
|
|
`-l' in `m4'.
|
1039 |
|
|
|
1040 |
|
|
`ascii'
|
1041 |
|
|
`-a' in `diff'.
|
1042 |
|
|
|
1043 |
|
|
`assign'
|
1044 |
|
|
`-v' in `gawk'.
|
1045 |
|
|
|
1046 |
|
|
`assume-new'
|
1047 |
|
|
`-W' in Make.
|
1048 |
|
|
|
1049 |
|
|
`assume-old'
|
1050 |
|
|
`-o' in Make.
|
1051 |
|
|
|
1052 |
|
|
`auto-check'
|
1053 |
|
|
`-a' in `recode'.
|
1054 |
|
|
|
1055 |
|
|
`auto-pager'
|
1056 |
|
|
`-a' in `wdiff'.
|
1057 |
|
|
|
1058 |
|
|
`auto-reference'
|
1059 |
|
|
`-A' in `ptx'.
|
1060 |
|
|
|
1061 |
|
|
`avoid-wraps'
|
1062 |
|
|
`-n' in `wdiff'.
|
1063 |
|
|
|
1064 |
|
|
`background'
|
1065 |
|
|
For server programs, run in the background.
|
1066 |
|
|
|
1067 |
|
|
`backward-search'
|
1068 |
|
|
`-B' in `ctags'.
|
1069 |
|
|
|
1070 |
|
|
`basename'
|
1071 |
|
|
`-f' in `shar'.
|
1072 |
|
|
|
1073 |
|
|
`batch'
|
1074 |
|
|
Used in GDB.
|
1075 |
|
|
|
1076 |
|
|
`baud'
|
1077 |
|
|
Used in GDB.
|
1078 |
|
|
|
1079 |
|
|
`before'
|
1080 |
|
|
`-b' in `tac'.
|
1081 |
|
|
|
1082 |
|
|
`binary'
|
1083 |
|
|
`-b' in `cpio' and `diff'.
|
1084 |
|
|
|
1085 |
|
|
`bits-per-code'
|
1086 |
|
|
`-b' in `shar'.
|
1087 |
|
|
|
1088 |
|
|
`block-size'
|
1089 |
|
|
Used in `cpio' and `tar'.
|
1090 |
|
|
|
1091 |
|
|
`blocks'
|
1092 |
|
|
`-b' in `head' and `tail'.
|
1093 |
|
|
|
1094 |
|
|
`break-file'
|
1095 |
|
|
`-b' in `ptx'.
|
1096 |
|
|
|
1097 |
|
|
`brief'
|
1098 |
|
|
Used in various programs to make output shorter.
|
1099 |
|
|
|
1100 |
|
|
`bytes'
|
1101 |
|
|
`-c' in `head', `split', and `tail'.
|
1102 |
|
|
|
1103 |
|
|
`c++'
|
1104 |
|
|
`-C' in `etags'.
|
1105 |
|
|
|
1106 |
|
|
`catenate'
|
1107 |
|
|
`-A' in `tar'.
|
1108 |
|
|
|
1109 |
|
|
`cd'
|
1110 |
|
|
Used in various programs to specify the directory to use.
|
1111 |
|
|
|
1112 |
|
|
`changes'
|
1113 |
|
|
`-c' in `chgrp' and `chown'.
|
1114 |
|
|
|
1115 |
|
|
`classify'
|
1116 |
|
|
`-F' in `ls'.
|
1117 |
|
|
|
1118 |
|
|
`colons'
|
1119 |
|
|
`-c' in `recode'.
|
1120 |
|
|
|
1121 |
|
|
`command'
|
1122 |
|
|
`-c' in `su'; `-x' in GDB.
|
1123 |
|
|
|
1124 |
|
|
`compare'
|
1125 |
|
|
`-d' in `tar'.
|
1126 |
|
|
|
1127 |
|
|
`compat'
|
1128 |
|
|
Used in `gawk'.
|
1129 |
|
|
|
1130 |
|
|
`compress'
|
1131 |
|
|
`-Z' in `tar' and `shar'.
|
1132 |
|
|
|
1133 |
|
|
`concatenate'
|
1134 |
|
|
`-A' in `tar'.
|
1135 |
|
|
|
1136 |
|
|
`confirmation'
|
1137 |
|
|
`-w' in `tar'.
|
1138 |
|
|
|
1139 |
|
|
`context'
|
1140 |
|
|
Used in `diff'.
|
1141 |
|
|
|
1142 |
|
|
`copyleft'
|
1143 |
|
|
`-W copyleft' in `gawk'.
|
1144 |
|
|
|
1145 |
|
|
`copyright'
|
1146 |
|
|
`-C' in `ptx', `recode', and `wdiff'; `-W copyright' in `gawk'.
|
1147 |
|
|
|
1148 |
|
|
`core'
|
1149 |
|
|
Used in GDB.
|
1150 |
|
|
|
1151 |
|
|
`count'
|
1152 |
|
|
`-q' in `who'.
|
1153 |
|
|
|
1154 |
|
|
`count-links'
|
1155 |
|
|
`-l' in `du'.
|
1156 |
|
|
|
1157 |
|
|
`create'
|
1158 |
|
|
Used in `tar' and `cpio'.
|
1159 |
|
|
|
1160 |
|
|
`cut-mark'
|
1161 |
|
|
`-c' in `shar'.
|
1162 |
|
|
|
1163 |
|
|
`cxref'
|
1164 |
|
|
`-x' in `ctags'.
|
1165 |
|
|
|
1166 |
|
|
`date'
|
1167 |
|
|
`-d' in `touch'.
|
1168 |
|
|
|
1169 |
|
|
`debug'
|
1170 |
|
|
`-d' in Make and `m4'; `-t' in Bison.
|
1171 |
|
|
|
1172 |
|
|
`define'
|
1173 |
|
|
`-D' in `m4'.
|
1174 |
|
|
|
1175 |
|
|
`defines'
|
1176 |
|
|
`-d' in Bison and `ctags'.
|
1177 |
|
|
|
1178 |
|
|
`delete'
|
1179 |
|
|
`-D' in `tar'.
|
1180 |
|
|
|
1181 |
|
|
`dereference'
|
1182 |
|
|
`-L' in `chgrp', `chown', `cpio', `du', `ls', and `tar'.
|
1183 |
|
|
|
1184 |
|
|
`dereference-args'
|
1185 |
|
|
`-D' in `du'.
|
1186 |
|
|
|
1187 |
|
|
`device'
|
1188 |
|
|
Specify an I/O device (special file name).
|
1189 |
|
|
|
1190 |
|
|
`diacritics'
|
1191 |
|
|
`-d' in `recode'.
|
1192 |
|
|
|
1193 |
|
|
`dictionary-order'
|
1194 |
|
|
`-d' in `look'.
|
1195 |
|
|
|
1196 |
|
|
`diff'
|
1197 |
|
|
`-d' in `tar'.
|
1198 |
|
|
|
1199 |
|
|
`digits'
|
1200 |
|
|
`-n' in `csplit'.
|
1201 |
|
|
|
1202 |
|
|
`directory'
|
1203 |
|
|
Specify the directory to use, in various programs. In `ls', it
|
1204 |
|
|
means to show directories themselves rather than their contents.
|
1205 |
|
|
In `rm' and `ln', it means to not treat links to directories
|
1206 |
|
|
specially.
|
1207 |
|
|
|
1208 |
|
|
`discard-all'
|
1209 |
|
|
`-x' in `strip'.
|
1210 |
|
|
|
1211 |
|
|
`discard-locals'
|
1212 |
|
|
`-X' in `strip'.
|
1213 |
|
|
|
1214 |
|
|
`dry-run'
|
1215 |
|
|
`-n' in Make.
|
1216 |
|
|
|
1217 |
|
|
`ed'
|
1218 |
|
|
`-e' in `diff'.
|
1219 |
|
|
|
1220 |
|
|
`elide-empty-files'
|
1221 |
|
|
`-z' in `csplit'.
|
1222 |
|
|
|
1223 |
|
|
`end-delete'
|
1224 |
|
|
`-x' in `wdiff'.
|
1225 |
|
|
|
1226 |
|
|
`end-insert'
|
1227 |
|
|
`-z' in `wdiff'.
|
1228 |
|
|
|
1229 |
|
|
`entire-new-file'
|
1230 |
|
|
`-N' in `diff'.
|
1231 |
|
|
|
1232 |
|
|
`environment-overrides'
|
1233 |
|
|
`-e' in Make.
|
1234 |
|
|
|
1235 |
|
|
`eof'
|
1236 |
|
|
`-e' in `xargs'.
|
1237 |
|
|
|
1238 |
|
|
`epoch'
|
1239 |
|
|
Used in GDB.
|
1240 |
|
|
|
1241 |
|
|
`error-limit'
|
1242 |
|
|
Used in `makeinfo'.
|
1243 |
|
|
|
1244 |
|
|
`error-output'
|
1245 |
|
|
`-o' in `m4'.
|
1246 |
|
|
|
1247 |
|
|
`escape'
|
1248 |
|
|
`-b' in `ls'.
|
1249 |
|
|
|
1250 |
|
|
`exclude-from'
|
1251 |
|
|
`-X' in `tar'.
|
1252 |
|
|
|
1253 |
|
|
`exec'
|
1254 |
|
|
Used in GDB.
|
1255 |
|
|
|
1256 |
|
|
`exit'
|
1257 |
|
|
`-x' in `xargs'.
|
1258 |
|
|
|
1259 |
|
|
`exit-0'
|
1260 |
|
|
`-e' in `unshar'.
|
1261 |
|
|
|
1262 |
|
|
`expand-tabs'
|
1263 |
|
|
`-t' in `diff'.
|
1264 |
|
|
|
1265 |
|
|
`expression'
|
1266 |
|
|
`-e' in `sed'.
|
1267 |
|
|
|
1268 |
|
|
`extern-only'
|
1269 |
|
|
`-g' in `nm'.
|
1270 |
|
|
|
1271 |
|
|
`extract'
|
1272 |
|
|
`-i' in `cpio'; `-x' in `tar'.
|
1273 |
|
|
|
1274 |
|
|
`faces'
|
1275 |
|
|
`-f' in `finger'.
|
1276 |
|
|
|
1277 |
|
|
`fast'
|
1278 |
|
|
`-f' in `su'.
|
1279 |
|
|
|
1280 |
|
|
`fatal-warnings'
|
1281 |
|
|
`-E' in `m4'.
|
1282 |
|
|
|
1283 |
|
|
`file'
|
1284 |
|
|
`-f' in `info', `gawk', Make, `mt', and `tar'; `-n' in `sed'; `-r'
|
1285 |
|
|
in `touch'.
|
1286 |
|
|
|
1287 |
|
|
`field-separator'
|
1288 |
|
|
`-F' in `gawk'.
|
1289 |
|
|
|
1290 |
|
|
`file-prefix'
|
1291 |
|
|
`-b' in Bison.
|
1292 |
|
|
|
1293 |
|
|
`file-type'
|
1294 |
|
|
`-F' in `ls'.
|
1295 |
|
|
|
1296 |
|
|
`files-from'
|
1297 |
|
|
`-T' in `tar'.
|
1298 |
|
|
|
1299 |
|
|
`fill-column'
|
1300 |
|
|
Used in `makeinfo'.
|
1301 |
|
|
|
1302 |
|
|
`flag-truncation'
|
1303 |
|
|
`-F' in `ptx'.
|
1304 |
|
|
|
1305 |
|
|
`fixed-output-files'
|
1306 |
|
|
`-y' in Bison.
|
1307 |
|
|
|
1308 |
|
|
`follow'
|
1309 |
|
|
`-f' in `tail'.
|
1310 |
|
|
|
1311 |
|
|
`footnote-style'
|
1312 |
|
|
Used in `makeinfo'.
|
1313 |
|
|
|
1314 |
|
|
`force'
|
1315 |
|
|
`-f' in `cp', `ln', `mv', and `rm'.
|
1316 |
|
|
|
1317 |
|
|
`force-prefix'
|
1318 |
|
|
`-F' in `shar'.
|
1319 |
|
|
|
1320 |
|
|
`foreground'
|
1321 |
|
|
For server programs, run in the foreground; in other words, don't
|
1322 |
|
|
do anything special to run the server in the background.
|
1323 |
|
|
|
1324 |
|
|
`format'
|
1325 |
|
|
Used in `ls', `time', and `ptx'.
|
1326 |
|
|
|
1327 |
|
|
`freeze-state'
|
1328 |
|
|
`-F' in `m4'.
|
1329 |
|
|
|
1330 |
|
|
`fullname'
|
1331 |
|
|
Used in GDB.
|
1332 |
|
|
|
1333 |
|
|
`gap-size'
|
1334 |
|
|
`-g' in `ptx'.
|
1335 |
|
|
|
1336 |
|
|
`get'
|
1337 |
|
|
`-x' in `tar'.
|
1338 |
|
|
|
1339 |
|
|
`graphic'
|
1340 |
|
|
`-i' in `ul'.
|
1341 |
|
|
|
1342 |
|
|
`graphics'
|
1343 |
|
|
`-g' in `recode'.
|
1344 |
|
|
|
1345 |
|
|
`group'
|
1346 |
|
|
`-g' in `install'.
|
1347 |
|
|
|
1348 |
|
|
`gzip'
|
1349 |
|
|
`-z' in `tar' and `shar'.
|
1350 |
|
|
|
1351 |
|
|
`hashsize'
|
1352 |
|
|
`-H' in `m4'.
|
1353 |
|
|
|
1354 |
|
|
`header'
|
1355 |
|
|
`-h' in `objdump' and `recode'
|
1356 |
|
|
|
1357 |
|
|
`heading'
|
1358 |
|
|
`-H' in `who'.
|
1359 |
|
|
|
1360 |
|
|
`help'
|
1361 |
|
|
Used to ask for brief usage information.
|
1362 |
|
|
|
1363 |
|
|
`here-delimiter'
|
1364 |
|
|
`-d' in `shar'.
|
1365 |
|
|
|
1366 |
|
|
`hide-control-chars'
|
1367 |
|
|
`-q' in `ls'.
|
1368 |
|
|
|
1369 |
|
|
`html'
|
1370 |
|
|
In `makeinfo', output HTML.
|
1371 |
|
|
|
1372 |
|
|
`idle'
|
1373 |
|
|
`-u' in `who'.
|
1374 |
|
|
|
1375 |
|
|
`ifdef'
|
1376 |
|
|
`-D' in `diff'.
|
1377 |
|
|
|
1378 |
|
|
`ignore'
|
1379 |
|
|
`-I' in `ls'; `-x' in `recode'.
|
1380 |
|
|
|
1381 |
|
|
`ignore-all-space'
|
1382 |
|
|
`-w' in `diff'.
|
1383 |
|
|
|
1384 |
|
|
`ignore-backups'
|
1385 |
|
|
`-B' in `ls'.
|
1386 |
|
|
|
1387 |
|
|
`ignore-blank-lines'
|
1388 |
|
|
`-B' in `diff'.
|
1389 |
|
|
|
1390 |
|
|
`ignore-case'
|
1391 |
|
|
`-f' in `look' and `ptx'; `-i' in `diff' and `wdiff'.
|
1392 |
|
|
|
1393 |
|
|
`ignore-errors'
|
1394 |
|
|
`-i' in Make.
|
1395 |
|
|
|
1396 |
|
|
`ignore-file'
|
1397 |
|
|
`-i' in `ptx'.
|
1398 |
|
|
|
1399 |
|
|
`ignore-indentation'
|
1400 |
|
|
`-I' in `etags'.
|
1401 |
|
|
|
1402 |
|
|
`ignore-init-file'
|
1403 |
|
|
`-f' in Oleo.
|
1404 |
|
|
|
1405 |
|
|
`ignore-interrupts'
|
1406 |
|
|
`-i' in `tee'.
|
1407 |
|
|
|
1408 |
|
|
`ignore-matching-lines'
|
1409 |
|
|
`-I' in `diff'.
|
1410 |
|
|
|
1411 |
|
|
`ignore-space-change'
|
1412 |
|
|
`-b' in `diff'.
|
1413 |
|
|
|
1414 |
|
|
`ignore-zeros'
|
1415 |
|
|
`-i' in `tar'.
|
1416 |
|
|
|
1417 |
|
|
`include'
|
1418 |
|
|
`-i' in `etags'; `-I' in `m4'.
|
1419 |
|
|
|
1420 |
|
|
`include-dir'
|
1421 |
|
|
`-I' in Make.
|
1422 |
|
|
|
1423 |
|
|
`incremental'
|
1424 |
|
|
`-G' in `tar'.
|
1425 |
|
|
|
1426 |
|
|
`info'
|
1427 |
|
|
`-i', `-l', and `-m' in Finger.
|
1428 |
|
|
|
1429 |
|
|
`init-file'
|
1430 |
|
|
In some programs, specify the name of the file to read as the
|
1431 |
|
|
user's init file.
|
1432 |
|
|
|
1433 |
|
|
`initial'
|
1434 |
|
|
`-i' in `expand'.
|
1435 |
|
|
|
1436 |
|
|
`initial-tab'
|
1437 |
|
|
`-T' in `diff'.
|
1438 |
|
|
|
1439 |
|
|
`inode'
|
1440 |
|
|
`-i' in `ls'.
|
1441 |
|
|
|
1442 |
|
|
`interactive'
|
1443 |
|
|
`-i' in `cp', `ln', `mv', `rm'; `-e' in `m4'; `-p' in `xargs';
|
1444 |
|
|
`-w' in `tar'.
|
1445 |
|
|
|
1446 |
|
|
`intermix-type'
|
1447 |
|
|
`-p' in `shar'.
|
1448 |
|
|
|
1449 |
|
|
`iso-8601'
|
1450 |
|
|
Used in `date'
|
1451 |
|
|
|
1452 |
|
|
`jobs'
|
1453 |
|
|
`-j' in Make.
|
1454 |
|
|
|
1455 |
|
|
`just-print'
|
1456 |
|
|
`-n' in Make.
|
1457 |
|
|
|
1458 |
|
|
`keep-going'
|
1459 |
|
|
`-k' in Make.
|
1460 |
|
|
|
1461 |
|
|
`keep-files'
|
1462 |
|
|
`-k' in `csplit'.
|
1463 |
|
|
|
1464 |
|
|
`kilobytes'
|
1465 |
|
|
`-k' in `du' and `ls'.
|
1466 |
|
|
|
1467 |
|
|
`language'
|
1468 |
|
|
`-l' in `etags'.
|
1469 |
|
|
|
1470 |
|
|
`less-mode'
|
1471 |
|
|
`-l' in `wdiff'.
|
1472 |
|
|
|
1473 |
|
|
`level-for-gzip'
|
1474 |
|
|
`-g' in `shar'.
|
1475 |
|
|
|
1476 |
|
|
`line-bytes'
|
1477 |
|
|
`-C' in `split'.
|
1478 |
|
|
|
1479 |
|
|
`lines'
|
1480 |
|
|
Used in `split', `head', and `tail'.
|
1481 |
|
|
|
1482 |
|
|
`link'
|
1483 |
|
|
`-l' in `cpio'.
|
1484 |
|
|
|
1485 |
|
|
`lint'
|
1486 |
|
|
`lint-old'
|
1487 |
|
|
Used in `gawk'.
|
1488 |
|
|
|
1489 |
|
|
`list'
|
1490 |
|
|
`-t' in `cpio'; `-l' in `recode'.
|
1491 |
|
|
|
1492 |
|
|
`list'
|
1493 |
|
|
`-t' in `tar'.
|
1494 |
|
|
|
1495 |
|
|
`literal'
|
1496 |
|
|
`-N' in `ls'.
|
1497 |
|
|
|
1498 |
|
|
`load-average'
|
1499 |
|
|
`-l' in Make.
|
1500 |
|
|
|
1501 |
|
|
`login'
|
1502 |
|
|
Used in `su'.
|
1503 |
|
|
|
1504 |
|
|
`machine'
|
1505 |
|
|
Used in `uname'.
|
1506 |
|
|
|
1507 |
|
|
`macro-name'
|
1508 |
|
|
`-M' in `ptx'.
|
1509 |
|
|
|
1510 |
|
|
`mail'
|
1511 |
|
|
`-m' in `hello' and `uname'.
|
1512 |
|
|
|
1513 |
|
|
`make-directories'
|
1514 |
|
|
`-d' in `cpio'.
|
1515 |
|
|
|
1516 |
|
|
`makefile'
|
1517 |
|
|
`-f' in Make.
|
1518 |
|
|
|
1519 |
|
|
`mapped'
|
1520 |
|
|
Used in GDB.
|
1521 |
|
|
|
1522 |
|
|
`max-args'
|
1523 |
|
|
`-n' in `xargs'.
|
1524 |
|
|
|
1525 |
|
|
`max-chars'
|
1526 |
|
|
`-n' in `xargs'.
|
1527 |
|
|
|
1528 |
|
|
`max-lines'
|
1529 |
|
|
`-l' in `xargs'.
|
1530 |
|
|
|
1531 |
|
|
`max-load'
|
1532 |
|
|
`-l' in Make.
|
1533 |
|
|
|
1534 |
|
|
`max-procs'
|
1535 |
|
|
`-P' in `xargs'.
|
1536 |
|
|
|
1537 |
|
|
`mesg'
|
1538 |
|
|
`-T' in `who'.
|
1539 |
|
|
|
1540 |
|
|
`message'
|
1541 |
|
|
`-T' in `who'.
|
1542 |
|
|
|
1543 |
|
|
`minimal'
|
1544 |
|
|
`-d' in `diff'.
|
1545 |
|
|
|
1546 |
|
|
`mixed-uuencode'
|
1547 |
|
|
`-M' in `shar'.
|
1548 |
|
|
|
1549 |
|
|
`mode'
|
1550 |
|
|
`-m' in `install', `mkdir', and `mkfifo'.
|
1551 |
|
|
|
1552 |
|
|
`modification-time'
|
1553 |
|
|
`-m' in `tar'.
|
1554 |
|
|
|
1555 |
|
|
`multi-volume'
|
1556 |
|
|
`-M' in `tar'.
|
1557 |
|
|
|
1558 |
|
|
`name-prefix'
|
1559 |
|
|
`-a' in Bison.
|
1560 |
|
|
|
1561 |
|
|
`nesting-limit'
|
1562 |
|
|
`-L' in `m4'.
|
1563 |
|
|
|
1564 |
|
|
`net-headers'
|
1565 |
|
|
`-a' in `shar'.
|
1566 |
|
|
|
1567 |
|
|
`new-file'
|
1568 |
|
|
`-W' in Make.
|
1569 |
|
|
|
1570 |
|
|
`no-builtin-rules'
|
1571 |
|
|
`-r' in Make.
|
1572 |
|
|
|
1573 |
|
|
`no-character-count'
|
1574 |
|
|
`-w' in `shar'.
|
1575 |
|
|
|
1576 |
|
|
`no-check-existing'
|
1577 |
|
|
`-x' in `shar'.
|
1578 |
|
|
|
1579 |
|
|
`no-common'
|
1580 |
|
|
`-3' in `wdiff'.
|
1581 |
|
|
|
1582 |
|
|
`no-create'
|
1583 |
|
|
`-c' in `touch'.
|
1584 |
|
|
|
1585 |
|
|
`no-defines'
|
1586 |
|
|
`-D' in `etags'.
|
1587 |
|
|
|
1588 |
|
|
`no-deleted'
|
1589 |
|
|
`-1' in `wdiff'.
|
1590 |
|
|
|
1591 |
|
|
`no-dereference'
|
1592 |
|
|
`-d' in `cp'.
|
1593 |
|
|
|
1594 |
|
|
`no-inserted'
|
1595 |
|
|
`-2' in `wdiff'.
|
1596 |
|
|
|
1597 |
|
|
`no-keep-going'
|
1598 |
|
|
`-S' in Make.
|
1599 |
|
|
|
1600 |
|
|
`no-lines'
|
1601 |
|
|
`-l' in Bison.
|
1602 |
|
|
|
1603 |
|
|
`no-piping'
|
1604 |
|
|
`-P' in `shar'.
|
1605 |
|
|
|
1606 |
|
|
`no-prof'
|
1607 |
|
|
`-e' in `gprof'.
|
1608 |
|
|
|
1609 |
|
|
`no-regex'
|
1610 |
|
|
`-R' in `etags'.
|
1611 |
|
|
|
1612 |
|
|
`no-sort'
|
1613 |
|
|
`-p' in `nm'.
|
1614 |
|
|
|
1615 |
|
|
`no-splash'
|
1616 |
|
|
Don't print a startup splash screen.
|
1617 |
|
|
|
1618 |
|
|
`no-split'
|
1619 |
|
|
Used in `makeinfo'.
|
1620 |
|
|
|
1621 |
|
|
`no-static'
|
1622 |
|
|
`-a' in `gprof'.
|
1623 |
|
|
|
1624 |
|
|
`no-time'
|
1625 |
|
|
`-E' in `gprof'.
|
1626 |
|
|
|
1627 |
|
|
`no-timestamp'
|
1628 |
|
|
`-m' in `shar'.
|
1629 |
|
|
|
1630 |
|
|
`no-validate'
|
1631 |
|
|
Used in `makeinfo'.
|
1632 |
|
|
|
1633 |
|
|
`no-wait'
|
1634 |
|
|
Used in `emacsclient'.
|
1635 |
|
|
|
1636 |
|
|
`no-warn'
|
1637 |
|
|
Used in various programs to inhibit warnings.
|
1638 |
|
|
|
1639 |
|
|
`node'
|
1640 |
|
|
`-n' in `info'.
|
1641 |
|
|
|
1642 |
|
|
`nodename'
|
1643 |
|
|
`-n' in `uname'.
|
1644 |
|
|
|
1645 |
|
|
`nonmatching'
|
1646 |
|
|
`-f' in `cpio'.
|
1647 |
|
|
|
1648 |
|
|
`nstuff'
|
1649 |
|
|
`-n' in `objdump'.
|
1650 |
|
|
|
1651 |
|
|
`null'
|
1652 |
|
|
`-0' in `xargs'.
|
1653 |
|
|
|
1654 |
|
|
`number'
|
1655 |
|
|
`-n' in `cat'.
|
1656 |
|
|
|
1657 |
|
|
`number-nonblank'
|
1658 |
|
|
`-b' in `cat'.
|
1659 |
|
|
|
1660 |
|
|
`numeric-sort'
|
1661 |
|
|
`-n' in `nm'.
|
1662 |
|
|
|
1663 |
|
|
`numeric-uid-gid'
|
1664 |
|
|
`-n' in `cpio' and `ls'.
|
1665 |
|
|
|
1666 |
|
|
`nx'
|
1667 |
|
|
Used in GDB.
|
1668 |
|
|
|
1669 |
|
|
`old-archive'
|
1670 |
|
|
`-o' in `tar'.
|
1671 |
|
|
|
1672 |
|
|
`old-file'
|
1673 |
|
|
`-o' in Make.
|
1674 |
|
|
|
1675 |
|
|
`one-file-system'
|
1676 |
|
|
`-l' in `tar', `cp', and `du'.
|
1677 |
|
|
|
1678 |
|
|
`only-file'
|
1679 |
|
|
`-o' in `ptx'.
|
1680 |
|
|
|
1681 |
|
|
`only-prof'
|
1682 |
|
|
`-f' in `gprof'.
|
1683 |
|
|
|
1684 |
|
|
`only-time'
|
1685 |
|
|
`-F' in `gprof'.
|
1686 |
|
|
|
1687 |
|
|
`options'
|
1688 |
|
|
`-o' in `getopt', `fdlist', `fdmount', `fdmountd', and `fdumount'.
|
1689 |
|
|
|
1690 |
|
|
`output'
|
1691 |
|
|
In various programs, specify the output file name.
|
1692 |
|
|
|
1693 |
|
|
`output-prefix'
|
1694 |
|
|
`-o' in `shar'.
|
1695 |
|
|
|
1696 |
|
|
`override'
|
1697 |
|
|
`-o' in `rm'.
|
1698 |
|
|
|
1699 |
|
|
`overwrite'
|
1700 |
|
|
`-c' in `unshar'.
|
1701 |
|
|
|
1702 |
|
|
`owner'
|
1703 |
|
|
`-o' in `install'.
|
1704 |
|
|
|
1705 |
|
|
`paginate'
|
1706 |
|
|
`-l' in `diff'.
|
1707 |
|
|
|
1708 |
|
|
`paragraph-indent'
|
1709 |
|
|
Used in `makeinfo'.
|
1710 |
|
|
|
1711 |
|
|
`parents'
|
1712 |
|
|
`-p' in `mkdir' and `rmdir'.
|
1713 |
|
|
|
1714 |
|
|
`pass-all'
|
1715 |
|
|
`-p' in `ul'.
|
1716 |
|
|
|
1717 |
|
|
`pass-through'
|
1718 |
|
|
`-p' in `cpio'.
|
1719 |
|
|
|
1720 |
|
|
`port'
|
1721 |
|
|
`-P' in `finger'.
|
1722 |
|
|
|
1723 |
|
|
`portability'
|
1724 |
|
|
`-c' in `cpio' and `tar'.
|
1725 |
|
|
|
1726 |
|
|
`posix'
|
1727 |
|
|
Used in `gawk'.
|
1728 |
|
|
|
1729 |
|
|
`prefix-builtins'
|
1730 |
|
|
`-P' in `m4'.
|
1731 |
|
|
|
1732 |
|
|
`prefix'
|
1733 |
|
|
`-f' in `csplit'.
|
1734 |
|
|
|
1735 |
|
|
`preserve'
|
1736 |
|
|
Used in `tar' and `cp'.
|
1737 |
|
|
|
1738 |
|
|
`preserve-environment'
|
1739 |
|
|
`-p' in `su'.
|
1740 |
|
|
|
1741 |
|
|
`preserve-modification-time'
|
1742 |
|
|
`-m' in `cpio'.
|
1743 |
|
|
|
1744 |
|
|
`preserve-order'
|
1745 |
|
|
`-s' in `tar'.
|
1746 |
|
|
|
1747 |
|
|
`preserve-permissions'
|
1748 |
|
|
`-p' in `tar'.
|
1749 |
|
|
|
1750 |
|
|
`print'
|
1751 |
|
|
`-l' in `diff'.
|
1752 |
|
|
|
1753 |
|
|
`print-chars'
|
1754 |
|
|
`-L' in `cmp'.
|
1755 |
|
|
|
1756 |
|
|
`print-data-base'
|
1757 |
|
|
`-p' in Make.
|
1758 |
|
|
|
1759 |
|
|
`print-directory'
|
1760 |
|
|
`-w' in Make.
|
1761 |
|
|
|
1762 |
|
|
`print-file-name'
|
1763 |
|
|
`-o' in `nm'.
|
1764 |
|
|
|
1765 |
|
|
`print-symdefs'
|
1766 |
|
|
`-s' in `nm'.
|
1767 |
|
|
|
1768 |
|
|
`printer'
|
1769 |
|
|
`-p' in `wdiff'.
|
1770 |
|
|
|
1771 |
|
|
`prompt'
|
1772 |
|
|
`-p' in `ed'.
|
1773 |
|
|
|
1774 |
|
|
`proxy'
|
1775 |
|
|
Specify an HTTP proxy.
|
1776 |
|
|
|
1777 |
|
|
`query-user'
|
1778 |
|
|
`-X' in `shar'.
|
1779 |
|
|
|
1780 |
|
|
`question'
|
1781 |
|
|
`-q' in Make.
|
1782 |
|
|
|
1783 |
|
|
`quiet'
|
1784 |
|
|
Used in many programs to inhibit the usual output. Every program
|
1785 |
|
|
accepting `--quiet' should accept `--silent' as a synonym.
|
1786 |
|
|
|
1787 |
|
|
`quiet-unshar'
|
1788 |
|
|
`-Q' in `shar'
|
1789 |
|
|
|
1790 |
|
|
`quote-name'
|
1791 |
|
|
`-Q' in `ls'.
|
1792 |
|
|
|
1793 |
|
|
`rcs'
|
1794 |
|
|
`-n' in `diff'.
|
1795 |
|
|
|
1796 |
|
|
`re-interval'
|
1797 |
|
|
Used in `gawk'.
|
1798 |
|
|
|
1799 |
|
|
`read-full-blocks'
|
1800 |
|
|
`-B' in `tar'.
|
1801 |
|
|
|
1802 |
|
|
`readnow'
|
1803 |
|
|
Used in GDB.
|
1804 |
|
|
|
1805 |
|
|
`recon'
|
1806 |
|
|
`-n' in Make.
|
1807 |
|
|
|
1808 |
|
|
`record-number'
|
1809 |
|
|
`-R' in `tar'.
|
1810 |
|
|
|
1811 |
|
|
`recursive'
|
1812 |
|
|
Used in `chgrp', `chown', `cp', `ls', `diff', and `rm'.
|
1813 |
|
|
|
1814 |
|
|
`reference-limit'
|
1815 |
|
|
Used in `makeinfo'.
|
1816 |
|
|
|
1817 |
|
|
`references'
|
1818 |
|
|
`-r' in `ptx'.
|
1819 |
|
|
|
1820 |
|
|
`regex'
|
1821 |
|
|
`-r' in `tac' and `etags'.
|
1822 |
|
|
|
1823 |
|
|
`release'
|
1824 |
|
|
`-r' in `uname'.
|
1825 |
|
|
|
1826 |
|
|
`reload-state'
|
1827 |
|
|
`-R' in `m4'.
|
1828 |
|
|
|
1829 |
|
|
`relocation'
|
1830 |
|
|
`-r' in `objdump'.
|
1831 |
|
|
|
1832 |
|
|
`rename'
|
1833 |
|
|
`-r' in `cpio'.
|
1834 |
|
|
|
1835 |
|
|
`replace'
|
1836 |
|
|
`-i' in `xargs'.
|
1837 |
|
|
|
1838 |
|
|
`report-identical-files'
|
1839 |
|
|
`-s' in `diff'.
|
1840 |
|
|
|
1841 |
|
|
`reset-access-time'
|
1842 |
|
|
`-a' in `cpio'.
|
1843 |
|
|
|
1844 |
|
|
`reverse'
|
1845 |
|
|
`-r' in `ls' and `nm'.
|
1846 |
|
|
|
1847 |
|
|
`reversed-ed'
|
1848 |
|
|
`-f' in `diff'.
|
1849 |
|
|
|
1850 |
|
|
`right-side-defs'
|
1851 |
|
|
`-R' in `ptx'.
|
1852 |
|
|
|
1853 |
|
|
`same-order'
|
1854 |
|
|
`-s' in `tar'.
|
1855 |
|
|
|
1856 |
|
|
`same-permissions'
|
1857 |
|
|
`-p' in `tar'.
|
1858 |
|
|
|
1859 |
|
|
`save'
|
1860 |
|
|
`-g' in `stty'.
|
1861 |
|
|
|
1862 |
|
|
`se'
|
1863 |
|
|
Used in GDB.
|
1864 |
|
|
|
1865 |
|
|
`sentence-regexp'
|
1866 |
|
|
`-S' in `ptx'.
|
1867 |
|
|
|
1868 |
|
|
`separate-dirs'
|
1869 |
|
|
`-S' in `du'.
|
1870 |
|
|
|
1871 |
|
|
`separator'
|
1872 |
|
|
`-s' in `tac'.
|
1873 |
|
|
|
1874 |
|
|
`sequence'
|
1875 |
|
|
Used by `recode' to chose files or pipes for sequencing passes.
|
1876 |
|
|
|
1877 |
|
|
`shell'
|
1878 |
|
|
`-s' in `su'.
|
1879 |
|
|
|
1880 |
|
|
`show-all'
|
1881 |
|
|
`-A' in `cat'.
|
1882 |
|
|
|
1883 |
|
|
`show-c-function'
|
1884 |
|
|
`-p' in `diff'.
|
1885 |
|
|
|
1886 |
|
|
`show-ends'
|
1887 |
|
|
`-E' in `cat'.
|
1888 |
|
|
|
1889 |
|
|
`show-function-line'
|
1890 |
|
|
`-F' in `diff'.
|
1891 |
|
|
|
1892 |
|
|
`show-tabs'
|
1893 |
|
|
`-T' in `cat'.
|
1894 |
|
|
|
1895 |
|
|
`silent'
|
1896 |
|
|
Used in many programs to inhibit the usual output. Every program
|
1897 |
|
|
accepting `--silent' should accept `--quiet' as a synonym.
|
1898 |
|
|
|
1899 |
|
|
`size'
|
1900 |
|
|
`-s' in `ls'.
|
1901 |
|
|
|
1902 |
|
|
`socket'
|
1903 |
|
|
Specify a file descriptor for a network server to use for its
|
1904 |
|
|
socket, instead of opening and binding a new socket. This
|
1905 |
|
|
provides a way to run, in a non-privileged process, a server that
|
1906 |
|
|
normally needs a reserved port number.
|
1907 |
|
|
|
1908 |
|
|
`sort'
|
1909 |
|
|
Used in `ls'.
|
1910 |
|
|
|
1911 |
|
|
`source'
|
1912 |
|
|
`-W source' in `gawk'.
|
1913 |
|
|
|
1914 |
|
|
`sparse'
|
1915 |
|
|
`-S' in `tar'.
|
1916 |
|
|
|
1917 |
|
|
`speed-large-files'
|
1918 |
|
|
`-H' in `diff'.
|
1919 |
|
|
|
1920 |
|
|
`split-at'
|
1921 |
|
|
`-E' in `unshar'.
|
1922 |
|
|
|
1923 |
|
|
`split-size-limit'
|
1924 |
|
|
`-L' in `shar'.
|
1925 |
|
|
|
1926 |
|
|
`squeeze-blank'
|
1927 |
|
|
`-s' in `cat'.
|
1928 |
|
|
|
1929 |
|
|
`start-delete'
|
1930 |
|
|
`-w' in `wdiff'.
|
1931 |
|
|
|
1932 |
|
|
`start-insert'
|
1933 |
|
|
`-y' in `wdiff'.
|
1934 |
|
|
|
1935 |
|
|
`starting-file'
|
1936 |
|
|
Used in `tar' and `diff' to specify which file within a directory
|
1937 |
|
|
to start processing with.
|
1938 |
|
|
|
1939 |
|
|
`statistics'
|
1940 |
|
|
`-s' in `wdiff'.
|
1941 |
|
|
|
1942 |
|
|
`stdin-file-list'
|
1943 |
|
|
`-S' in `shar'.
|
1944 |
|
|
|
1945 |
|
|
`stop'
|
1946 |
|
|
`-S' in Make.
|
1947 |
|
|
|
1948 |
|
|
`strict'
|
1949 |
|
|
`-s' in `recode'.
|
1950 |
|
|
|
1951 |
|
|
`strip'
|
1952 |
|
|
`-s' in `install'.
|
1953 |
|
|
|
1954 |
|
|
`strip-all'
|
1955 |
|
|
`-s' in `strip'.
|
1956 |
|
|
|
1957 |
|
|
`strip-debug'
|
1958 |
|
|
`-S' in `strip'.
|
1959 |
|
|
|
1960 |
|
|
`submitter'
|
1961 |
|
|
`-s' in `shar'.
|
1962 |
|
|
|
1963 |
|
|
`suffix'
|
1964 |
|
|
`-S' in `cp', `ln', `mv'.
|
1965 |
|
|
|
1966 |
|
|
`suffix-format'
|
1967 |
|
|
`-b' in `csplit'.
|
1968 |
|
|
|
1969 |
|
|
`sum'
|
1970 |
|
|
`-s' in `gprof'.
|
1971 |
|
|
|
1972 |
|
|
`summarize'
|
1973 |
|
|
`-s' in `du'.
|
1974 |
|
|
|
1975 |
|
|
`symbolic'
|
1976 |
|
|
`-s' in `ln'.
|
1977 |
|
|
|
1978 |
|
|
`symbols'
|
1979 |
|
|
Used in GDB and `objdump'.
|
1980 |
|
|
|
1981 |
|
|
`synclines'
|
1982 |
|
|
`-s' in `m4'.
|
1983 |
|
|
|
1984 |
|
|
`sysname'
|
1985 |
|
|
`-s' in `uname'.
|
1986 |
|
|
|
1987 |
|
|
`tabs'
|
1988 |
|
|
`-t' in `expand' and `unexpand'.
|
1989 |
|
|
|
1990 |
|
|
`tabsize'
|
1991 |
|
|
`-T' in `ls'.
|
1992 |
|
|
|
1993 |
|
|
`terminal'
|
1994 |
|
|
`-T' in `tput' and `ul'. `-t' in `wdiff'.
|
1995 |
|
|
|
1996 |
|
|
`text'
|
1997 |
|
|
`-a' in `diff'.
|
1998 |
|
|
|
1999 |
|
|
`text-files'
|
2000 |
|
|
`-T' in `shar'.
|
2001 |
|
|
|
2002 |
|
|
`time'
|
2003 |
|
|
Used in `ls' and `touch'.
|
2004 |
|
|
|
2005 |
|
|
`timeout'
|
2006 |
|
|
Specify how long to wait before giving up on some operation.
|
2007 |
|
|
|
2008 |
|
|
`to-stdout'
|
2009 |
|
|
`-O' in `tar'.
|
2010 |
|
|
|
2011 |
|
|
`total'
|
2012 |
|
|
`-c' in `du'.
|
2013 |
|
|
|
2014 |
|
|
`touch'
|
2015 |
|
|
`-t' in Make, `ranlib', and `recode'.
|
2016 |
|
|
|
2017 |
|
|
`trace'
|
2018 |
|
|
`-t' in `m4'.
|
2019 |
|
|
|
2020 |
|
|
`traditional'
|
2021 |
|
|
`-t' in `hello'; `-W traditional' in `gawk'; `-G' in `ed', `m4',
|
2022 |
|
|
and `ptx'.
|
2023 |
|
|
|
2024 |
|
|
`tty'
|
2025 |
|
|
Used in GDB.
|
2026 |
|
|
|
2027 |
|
|
`typedefs'
|
2028 |
|
|
`-t' in `ctags'.
|
2029 |
|
|
|
2030 |
|
|
`typedefs-and-c++'
|
2031 |
|
|
`-T' in `ctags'.
|
2032 |
|
|
|
2033 |
|
|
`typeset-mode'
|
2034 |
|
|
`-t' in `ptx'.
|
2035 |
|
|
|
2036 |
|
|
`uncompress'
|
2037 |
|
|
`-z' in `tar'.
|
2038 |
|
|
|
2039 |
|
|
`unconditional'
|
2040 |
|
|
`-u' in `cpio'.
|
2041 |
|
|
|
2042 |
|
|
`undefine'
|
2043 |
|
|
`-U' in `m4'.
|
2044 |
|
|
|
2045 |
|
|
`undefined-only'
|
2046 |
|
|
`-u' in `nm'.
|
2047 |
|
|
|
2048 |
|
|
`update'
|
2049 |
|
|
`-u' in `cp', `ctags', `mv', `tar'.
|
2050 |
|
|
|
2051 |
|
|
`usage'
|
2052 |
|
|
Used in `gawk'; same as `--help'.
|
2053 |
|
|
|
2054 |
|
|
`uuencode'
|
2055 |
|
|
`-B' in `shar'.
|
2056 |
|
|
|
2057 |
|
|
`vanilla-operation'
|
2058 |
|
|
`-V' in `shar'.
|
2059 |
|
|
|
2060 |
|
|
`verbose'
|
2061 |
|
|
Print more information about progress. Many programs support this.
|
2062 |
|
|
|
2063 |
|
|
`verify'
|
2064 |
|
|
`-W' in `tar'.
|
2065 |
|
|
|
2066 |
|
|
`version'
|
2067 |
|
|
Print the version number.
|
2068 |
|
|
|
2069 |
|
|
`version-control'
|
2070 |
|
|
`-V' in `cp', `ln', `mv'.
|
2071 |
|
|
|
2072 |
|
|
`vgrind'
|
2073 |
|
|
`-v' in `ctags'.
|
2074 |
|
|
|
2075 |
|
|
`volume'
|
2076 |
|
|
`-V' in `tar'.
|
2077 |
|
|
|
2078 |
|
|
`what-if'
|
2079 |
|
|
`-W' in Make.
|
2080 |
|
|
|
2081 |
|
|
`whole-size-limit'
|
2082 |
|
|
`-l' in `shar'.
|
2083 |
|
|
|
2084 |
|
|
`width'
|
2085 |
|
|
`-w' in `ls' and `ptx'.
|
2086 |
|
|
|
2087 |
|
|
`word-regexp'
|
2088 |
|
|
`-W' in `ptx'.
|
2089 |
|
|
|
2090 |
|
|
`writable'
|
2091 |
|
|
`-T' in `who'.
|
2092 |
|
|
|
2093 |
|
|
`zeros'
|
2094 |
|
|
`-z' in `gprof'.
|
2095 |
|
|
|
2096 |
|
|
|
2097 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Memory Usage, Next: File Usage, Prev: Option Table, Up: Program Behavior
|
2098 |
|
|
|
2099 |
|
|
4.9 Memory Usage
|
2100 |
|
|
================
|
2101 |
|
|
|
2102 |
|
|
If a program typically uses just a few meg of memory, don't bother
|
2103 |
|
|
making any effort to reduce memory usage. For example, if it is
|
2104 |
|
|
impractical for other reasons to operate on files more than a few meg
|
2105 |
|
|
long, it is reasonable to read entire input files into memory to
|
2106 |
|
|
operate on them.
|
2107 |
|
|
|
2108 |
|
|
However, for programs such as `cat' or `tail', that can usefully
|
2109 |
|
|
operate on very large files, it is important to avoid using a technique
|
2110 |
|
|
that would artificially limit the size of files it can handle. If a
|
2111 |
|
|
program works by lines and could be applied to arbitrary user-supplied
|
2112 |
|
|
input files, it should keep only a line in memory, because this is not
|
2113 |
|
|
very hard and users will want to be able to operate on input files that
|
2114 |
|
|
are bigger than will fit in memory all at once.
|
2115 |
|
|
|
2116 |
|
|
If your program creates complicated data structures, just make them
|
2117 |
|
|
in memory and give a fatal error if `malloc' returns zero.
|
2118 |
|
|
|
2119 |
|
|
|
2120 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: File Usage, Prev: Memory Usage, Up: Program Behavior
|
2121 |
|
|
|
2122 |
|
|
4.10 File Usage
|
2123 |
|
|
===============
|
2124 |
|
|
|
2125 |
|
|
Programs should be prepared to operate when `/usr' and `/etc' are
|
2126 |
|
|
read-only file systems. Thus, if the program manages log files, lock
|
2127 |
|
|
files, backup files, score files, or any other files which are modified
|
2128 |
|
|
for internal purposes, these files should not be stored in `/usr' or
|
2129 |
|
|
`/etc'.
|
2130 |
|
|
|
2131 |
|
|
There are two exceptions. `/etc' is used to store system
|
2132 |
|
|
configuration information; it is reasonable for a program to modify
|
2133 |
|
|
files in `/etc' when its job is to update the system configuration.
|
2134 |
|
|
Also, if the user explicitly asks to modify one file in a directory, it
|
2135 |
|
|
is reasonable for the program to store other files in the same
|
2136 |
|
|
directory.
|
2137 |
|
|
|
2138 |
|
|
|
2139 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Writing C, Next: Documentation, Prev: Program Behavior, Up: Top
|
2140 |
|
|
|
2141 |
|
|
5 Making The Best Use of C
|
2142 |
|
|
**************************
|
2143 |
|
|
|
2144 |
|
|
This chapter provides advice on how best to use the C language when
|
2145 |
|
|
writing GNU software.
|
2146 |
|
|
|
2147 |
|
|
* Menu:
|
2148 |
|
|
|
2149 |
|
|
* Formatting:: Formatting your source code.
|
2150 |
|
|
* Comments:: Commenting your work.
|
2151 |
|
|
* Syntactic Conventions:: Clean use of C constructs.
|
2152 |
|
|
* Names:: Naming variables, functions, and files.
|
2153 |
|
|
* System Portability:: Portability among different operating systems.
|
2154 |
|
|
* CPU Portability:: Supporting the range of CPU types.
|
2155 |
|
|
* System Functions:: Portability and ``standard'' library functions.
|
2156 |
|
|
* Internationalization:: Techniques for internationalization.
|
2157 |
|
|
* Character Set:: Use ASCII by default.
|
2158 |
|
|
* Quote Characters:: Use `...' in the C locale.
|
2159 |
|
|
* Mmap:: How you can safely use `mmap'.
|
2160 |
|
|
|
2161 |
|
|
|
2162 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Formatting, Next: Comments, Up: Writing C
|
2163 |
|
|
|
2164 |
|
|
5.1 Formatting Your Source Code
|
2165 |
|
|
===============================
|
2166 |
|
|
|
2167 |
|
|
It is important to put the open-brace that starts the body of a C
|
2168 |
|
|
function in column one, so that they will start a defun. Several tools
|
2169 |
|
|
look for open-braces in column one to find the beginnings of C
|
2170 |
|
|
functions. These tools will not work on code not formatted that way.
|
2171 |
|
|
|
2172 |
|
|
Avoid putting open-brace, open-parenthesis or open-bracket in column
|
2173 |
|
|
one when they are inside a function, so that they won't start a defun.
|
2174 |
|
|
The open-brace that starts a `struct' body can go in column one if you
|
2175 |
|
|
find it useful to treat that definition as a defun.
|
2176 |
|
|
|
2177 |
|
|
It is also important for function definitions to start the name of
|
2178 |
|
|
the function in column one. This helps people to search for function
|
2179 |
|
|
definitions, and may also help certain tools recognize them. Thus,
|
2180 |
|
|
using Standard C syntax, the format is this:
|
2181 |
|
|
|
2182 |
|
|
static char *
|
2183 |
|
|
concat (char *s1, char *s2)
|
2184 |
|
|
{
|
2185 |
|
|
...
|
2186 |
|
|
}
|
2187 |
|
|
|
2188 |
|
|
or, if you want to use traditional C syntax, format the definition like
|
2189 |
|
|
this:
|
2190 |
|
|
|
2191 |
|
|
static char *
|
2192 |
|
|
concat (s1, s2) /* Name starts in column one here */
|
2193 |
|
|
char *s1, *s2;
|
2194 |
|
|
{ /* Open brace in column one here */
|
2195 |
|
|
...
|
2196 |
|
|
}
|
2197 |
|
|
|
2198 |
|
|
In Standard C, if the arguments don't fit nicely on one line, split
|
2199 |
|
|
it like this:
|
2200 |
|
|
|
2201 |
|
|
int
|
2202 |
|
|
lots_of_args (int an_integer, long a_long, short a_short,
|
2203 |
|
|
double a_double, float a_float)
|
2204 |
|
|
...
|
2205 |
|
|
|
2206 |
|
|
The rest of this section gives our recommendations for other aspects
|
2207 |
|
|
of C formatting style, which is also the default style of the `indent'
|
2208 |
|
|
program in version 1.2 and newer. It corresponds to the options
|
2209 |
|
|
|
2210 |
|
|
-nbad -bap -nbc -bbo -bl -bli2 -bls -ncdb -nce -cp1 -cs -di2
|
2211 |
|
|
-ndj -nfc1 -nfca -hnl -i2 -ip5 -lp -pcs -psl -nsc -nsob
|
2212 |
|
|
|
2213 |
|
|
We don't think of these recommendations as requirements, because it
|
2214 |
|
|
causes no problems for users if two different programs have different
|
2215 |
|
|
formatting styles.
|
2216 |
|
|
|
2217 |
|
|
But whatever style you use, please use it consistently, since a
|
2218 |
|
|
mixture of styles within one program tends to look ugly. If you are
|
2219 |
|
|
contributing changes to an existing program, please follow the style of
|
2220 |
|
|
that program.
|
2221 |
|
|
|
2222 |
|
|
For the body of the function, our recommended style looks like this:
|
2223 |
|
|
|
2224 |
|
|
if (x < foo (y, z))
|
2225 |
|
|
haha = bar[4] + 5;
|
2226 |
|
|
else
|
2227 |
|
|
{
|
2228 |
|
|
while (z)
|
2229 |
|
|
{
|
2230 |
|
|
haha += foo (z, z);
|
2231 |
|
|
z--;
|
2232 |
|
|
}
|
2233 |
|
|
return ++x + bar ();
|
2234 |
|
|
}
|
2235 |
|
|
|
2236 |
|
|
We find it easier to read a program when it has spaces before the
|
2237 |
|
|
open-parentheses and after the commas. Especially after the commas.
|
2238 |
|
|
|
2239 |
|
|
When you split an expression into multiple lines, split it before an
|
2240 |
|
|
operator, not after one. Here is the right way:
|
2241 |
|
|
|
2242 |
|
|
if (foo_this_is_long && bar > win (x, y, z)
|
2243 |
|
|
&& remaining_condition)
|
2244 |
|
|
|
2245 |
|
|
Try to avoid having two operators of different precedence at the same
|
2246 |
|
|
level of indentation. For example, don't write this:
|
2247 |
|
|
|
2248 |
|
|
mode = (inmode[j] == VOIDmode
|
2249 |
|
|
|| GET_MODE_SIZE (outmode[j]) > GET_MODE_SIZE (inmode[j])
|
2250 |
|
|
? outmode[j] : inmode[j]);
|
2251 |
|
|
|
2252 |
|
|
Instead, use extra parentheses so that the indentation shows the
|
2253 |
|
|
nesting:
|
2254 |
|
|
|
2255 |
|
|
mode = ((inmode[j] == VOIDmode
|
2256 |
|
|
|| (GET_MODE_SIZE (outmode[j]) > GET_MODE_SIZE (inmode[j])))
|
2257 |
|
|
? outmode[j] : inmode[j]);
|
2258 |
|
|
|
2259 |
|
|
Insert extra parentheses so that Emacs will indent the code properly.
|
2260 |
|
|
For example, the following indentation looks nice if you do it by hand,
|
2261 |
|
|
|
2262 |
|
|
v = rup->ru_utime.tv_sec*1000 + rup->ru_utime.tv_usec/1000
|
2263 |
|
|
+ rup->ru_stime.tv_sec*1000 + rup->ru_stime.tv_usec/1000;
|
2264 |
|
|
|
2265 |
|
|
but Emacs would alter it. Adding a set of parentheses produces
|
2266 |
|
|
something that looks equally nice, and which Emacs will preserve:
|
2267 |
|
|
|
2268 |
|
|
v = (rup->ru_utime.tv_sec*1000 + rup->ru_utime.tv_usec/1000
|
2269 |
|
|
+ rup->ru_stime.tv_sec*1000 + rup->ru_stime.tv_usec/1000);
|
2270 |
|
|
|
2271 |
|
|
Format do-while statements like this:
|
2272 |
|
|
|
2273 |
|
|
do
|
2274 |
|
|
{
|
2275 |
|
|
a = foo (a);
|
2276 |
|
|
}
|
2277 |
|
|
while (a > 0);
|
2278 |
|
|
|
2279 |
|
|
Please use formfeed characters (control-L) to divide the program into
|
2280 |
|
|
pages at logical places (but not within a function). It does not matter
|
2281 |
|
|
just how long the pages are, since they do not have to fit on a printed
|
2282 |
|
|
page. The formfeeds should appear alone on lines by themselves.
|
2283 |
|
|
|
2284 |
|
|
|
2285 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Comments, Next: Syntactic Conventions, Prev: Formatting, Up: Writing C
|
2286 |
|
|
|
2287 |
|
|
5.2 Commenting Your Work
|
2288 |
|
|
========================
|
2289 |
|
|
|
2290 |
|
|
Every program should start with a comment saying briefly what it is for.
|
2291 |
|
|
Example: `fmt - filter for simple filling of text'. This comment
|
2292 |
|
|
should be at the top of the source file containing the `main' function
|
2293 |
|
|
of the program.
|
2294 |
|
|
|
2295 |
|
|
Also, please write a brief comment at the start of each source file,
|
2296 |
|
|
with the file name and a line or two about the overall purpose of the
|
2297 |
|
|
file.
|
2298 |
|
|
|
2299 |
|
|
Please write the comments in a GNU program in English, because
|
2300 |
|
|
English is the one language that nearly all programmers in all
|
2301 |
|
|
countries can read. If you do not write English well, please write
|
2302 |
|
|
comments in English as well as you can, then ask other people to help
|
2303 |
|
|
rewrite them. If you can't write comments in English, please find
|
2304 |
|
|
someone to work with you and translate your comments into English.
|
2305 |
|
|
|
2306 |
|
|
Please put a comment on each function saying what the function does,
|
2307 |
|
|
what sorts of arguments it gets, and what the possible values of
|
2308 |
|
|
arguments mean and are used for. It is not necessary to duplicate in
|
2309 |
|
|
words the meaning of the C argument declarations, if a C type is being
|
2310 |
|
|
used in its customary fashion. If there is anything nonstandard about
|
2311 |
|
|
its use (such as an argument of type `char *' which is really the
|
2312 |
|
|
address of the second character of a string, not the first), or any
|
2313 |
|
|
possible values that would not work the way one would expect (such as,
|
2314 |
|
|
that strings containing newlines are not guaranteed to work), be sure
|
2315 |
|
|
to say so.
|
2316 |
|
|
|
2317 |
|
|
Also explain the significance of the return value, if there is one.
|
2318 |
|
|
|
2319 |
|
|
Please put two spaces after the end of a sentence in your comments,
|
2320 |
|
|
so that the Emacs sentence commands will work. Also, please write
|
2321 |
|
|
complete sentences and capitalize the first word. If a lower-case
|
2322 |
|
|
identifier comes at the beginning of a sentence, don't capitalize it!
|
2323 |
|
|
Changing the spelling makes it a different identifier. If you don't
|
2324 |
|
|
like starting a sentence with a lower case letter, write the sentence
|
2325 |
|
|
differently (e.g., "The identifier lower-case is ...").
|
2326 |
|
|
|
2327 |
|
|
The comment on a function is much clearer if you use the argument
|
2328 |
|
|
names to speak about the argument values. The variable name itself
|
2329 |
|
|
should be lower case, but write it in upper case when you are speaking
|
2330 |
|
|
about the value rather than the variable itself. Thus, "the inode
|
2331 |
|
|
number NODE_NUM" rather than "an inode".
|
2332 |
|
|
|
2333 |
|
|
There is usually no purpose in restating the name of the function in
|
2334 |
|
|
the comment before it, because the reader can see that for himself.
|
2335 |
|
|
There might be an exception when the comment is so long that the
|
2336 |
|
|
function itself would be off the bottom of the screen.
|
2337 |
|
|
|
2338 |
|
|
There should be a comment on each static variable as well, like this:
|
2339 |
|
|
|
2340 |
|
|
/* Nonzero means truncate lines in the display;
|
2341 |
|
|
zero means continue them. */
|
2342 |
|
|
int truncate_lines;
|
2343 |
|
|
|
2344 |
|
|
Every `#endif' should have a comment, except in the case of short
|
2345 |
|
|
conditionals (just a few lines) that are not nested. The comment should
|
2346 |
|
|
state the condition of the conditional that is ending, _including its
|
2347 |
|
|
sense_. `#else' should have a comment describing the condition _and
|
2348 |
|
|
sense_ of the code that follows. For example:
|
2349 |
|
|
|
2350 |
|
|
#ifdef foo
|
2351 |
|
|
...
|
2352 |
|
|
#else /* not foo */
|
2353 |
|
|
...
|
2354 |
|
|
#endif /* not foo */
|
2355 |
|
|
#ifdef foo
|
2356 |
|
|
...
|
2357 |
|
|
#endif /* foo */
|
2358 |
|
|
|
2359 |
|
|
but, by contrast, write the comments this way for a `#ifndef':
|
2360 |
|
|
|
2361 |
|
|
#ifndef foo
|
2362 |
|
|
...
|
2363 |
|
|
#else /* foo */
|
2364 |
|
|
...
|
2365 |
|
|
#endif /* foo */
|
2366 |
|
|
#ifndef foo
|
2367 |
|
|
...
|
2368 |
|
|
#endif /* not foo */
|
2369 |
|
|
|
2370 |
|
|
|
2371 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Syntactic Conventions, Next: Names, Prev: Comments, Up: Writing C
|
2372 |
|
|
|
2373 |
|
|
5.3 Clean Use of C Constructs
|
2374 |
|
|
=============================
|
2375 |
|
|
|
2376 |
|
|
Please explicitly declare the types of all objects. For example, you
|
2377 |
|
|
should explicitly declare all arguments to functions, and you should
|
2378 |
|
|
declare functions to return `int' rather than omitting the `int'.
|
2379 |
|
|
|
2380 |
|
|
Some programmers like to use the GCC `-Wall' option, and change the
|
2381 |
|
|
code whenever it issues a warning. If you want to do this, then do.
|
2382 |
|
|
Other programmers prefer not to use `-Wall', because it gives warnings
|
2383 |
|
|
for valid and legitimate code which they do not want to change. If you
|
2384 |
|
|
want to do this, then do. The compiler should be your servant, not
|
2385 |
|
|
your master.
|
2386 |
|
|
|
2387 |
|
|
Declarations of external functions and functions to appear later in
|
2388 |
|
|
the source file should all go in one place near the beginning of the
|
2389 |
|
|
file (somewhere before the first function definition in the file), or
|
2390 |
|
|
else should go in a header file. Don't put `extern' declarations inside
|
2391 |
|
|
functions.
|
2392 |
|
|
|
2393 |
|
|
It used to be common practice to use the same local variables (with
|
2394 |
|
|
names like `tem') over and over for different values within one
|
2395 |
|
|
function. Instead of doing this, it is better to declare a separate
|
2396 |
|
|
local variable for each distinct purpose, and give it a name which is
|
2397 |
|
|
meaningful. This not only makes programs easier to understand, it also
|
2398 |
|
|
facilitates optimization by good compilers. You can also move the
|
2399 |
|
|
declaration of each local variable into the smallest scope that includes
|
2400 |
|
|
all its uses. This makes the program even cleaner.
|
2401 |
|
|
|
2402 |
|
|
Don't use local variables or parameters that shadow global
|
2403 |
|
|
identifiers.
|
2404 |
|
|
|
2405 |
|
|
Don't declare multiple variables in one declaration that spans lines.
|
2406 |
|
|
Start a new declaration on each line, instead. For example, instead of
|
2407 |
|
|
this:
|
2408 |
|
|
|
2409 |
|
|
int foo,
|
2410 |
|
|
bar;
|
2411 |
|
|
|
2412 |
|
|
write either this:
|
2413 |
|
|
|
2414 |
|
|
int foo, bar;
|
2415 |
|
|
|
2416 |
|
|
or this:
|
2417 |
|
|
|
2418 |
|
|
int foo;
|
2419 |
|
|
int bar;
|
2420 |
|
|
|
2421 |
|
|
(If they are global variables, each should have a comment preceding it
|
2422 |
|
|
anyway.)
|
2423 |
|
|
|
2424 |
|
|
When you have an `if'-`else' statement nested in another `if'
|
2425 |
|
|
statement, always put braces around the `if'-`else'. Thus, never write
|
2426 |
|
|
like this:
|
2427 |
|
|
|
2428 |
|
|
if (foo)
|
2429 |
|
|
if (bar)
|
2430 |
|
|
win ();
|
2431 |
|
|
else
|
2432 |
|
|
lose ();
|
2433 |
|
|
|
2434 |
|
|
always like this:
|
2435 |
|
|
|
2436 |
|
|
if (foo)
|
2437 |
|
|
{
|
2438 |
|
|
if (bar)
|
2439 |
|
|
win ();
|
2440 |
|
|
else
|
2441 |
|
|
lose ();
|
2442 |
|
|
}
|
2443 |
|
|
|
2444 |
|
|
If you have an `if' statement nested inside of an `else' statement,
|
2445 |
|
|
either write `else if' on one line, like this,
|
2446 |
|
|
|
2447 |
|
|
if (foo)
|
2448 |
|
|
...
|
2449 |
|
|
else if (bar)
|
2450 |
|
|
...
|
2451 |
|
|
|
2452 |
|
|
with its `then'-part indented like the preceding `then'-part, or write
|
2453 |
|
|
the nested `if' within braces like this:
|
2454 |
|
|
|
2455 |
|
|
if (foo)
|
2456 |
|
|
...
|
2457 |
|
|
else
|
2458 |
|
|
{
|
2459 |
|
|
if (bar)
|
2460 |
|
|
...
|
2461 |
|
|
}
|
2462 |
|
|
|
2463 |
|
|
Don't declare both a structure tag and variables or typedefs in the
|
2464 |
|
|
same declaration. Instead, declare the structure tag separately and
|
2465 |
|
|
then use it to declare the variables or typedefs.
|
2466 |
|
|
|
2467 |
|
|
Try to avoid assignments inside `if'-conditions (assignments inside
|
2468 |
|
|
`while'-conditions are ok). For example, don't write this:
|
2469 |
|
|
|
2470 |
|
|
if ((foo = (char *) malloc (sizeof *foo)) == 0)
|
2471 |
|
|
fatal ("virtual memory exhausted");
|
2472 |
|
|
|
2473 |
|
|
instead, write this:
|
2474 |
|
|
|
2475 |
|
|
foo = (char *) malloc (sizeof *foo);
|
2476 |
|
|
if (foo == 0)
|
2477 |
|
|
fatal ("virtual memory exhausted");
|
2478 |
|
|
|
2479 |
|
|
Don't make the program ugly to placate `lint'. Please don't insert
|
2480 |
|
|
any casts to `void'. Zero without a cast is perfectly fine as a null
|
2481 |
|
|
pointer constant, except when calling a varargs function.
|
2482 |
|
|
|
2483 |
|
|
|
2484 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Names, Next: System Portability, Prev: Syntactic Conventions, Up: Writing C
|
2485 |
|
|
|
2486 |
|
|
5.4 Naming Variables, Functions, and Files
|
2487 |
|
|
==========================================
|
2488 |
|
|
|
2489 |
|
|
The names of global variables and functions in a program serve as
|
2490 |
|
|
comments of a sort. So don't choose terse names--instead, look for
|
2491 |
|
|
names that give useful information about the meaning of the variable or
|
2492 |
|
|
function. In a GNU program, names should be English, like other
|
2493 |
|
|
comments.
|
2494 |
|
|
|
2495 |
|
|
Local variable names can be shorter, because they are used only
|
2496 |
|
|
within one context, where (presumably) comments explain their purpose.
|
2497 |
|
|
|
2498 |
|
|
Try to limit your use of abbreviations in symbol names. It is ok to
|
2499 |
|
|
make a few abbreviations, explain what they mean, and then use them
|
2500 |
|
|
frequently, but don't use lots of obscure abbreviations.
|
2501 |
|
|
|
2502 |
|
|
Please use underscores to separate words in a name, so that the Emacs
|
2503 |
|
|
word commands can be useful within them. Stick to lower case; reserve
|
2504 |
|
|
upper case for macros and `enum' constants, and for name-prefixes that
|
2505 |
|
|
follow a uniform convention.
|
2506 |
|
|
|
2507 |
|
|
For example, you should use names like `ignore_space_change_flag';
|
2508 |
|
|
don't use names like `iCantReadThis'.
|
2509 |
|
|
|
2510 |
|
|
Variables that indicate whether command-line options have been
|
2511 |
|
|
specified should be named after the meaning of the option, not after
|
2512 |
|
|
the option-letter. A comment should state both the exact meaning of
|
2513 |
|
|
the option and its letter. For example,
|
2514 |
|
|
|
2515 |
|
|
/* Ignore changes in horizontal whitespace (-b). */
|
2516 |
|
|
int ignore_space_change_flag;
|
2517 |
|
|
|
2518 |
|
|
When you want to define names with constant integer values, use
|
2519 |
|
|
`enum' rather than `#define'. GDB knows about enumeration constants.
|
2520 |
|
|
|
2521 |
|
|
You might want to make sure that none of the file names would
|
2522 |
|
|
conflict if the files were loaded onto an MS-DOS file system which
|
2523 |
|
|
shortens the names. You can use the program `doschk' to test for this.
|
2524 |
|
|
|
2525 |
|
|
Some GNU programs were designed to limit themselves to file names of
|
2526 |
|
|
14 characters or less, to avoid file name conflicts if they are read
|
2527 |
|
|
into older System V systems. Please preserve this feature in the
|
2528 |
|
|
existing GNU programs that have it, but there is no need to do this in
|
2529 |
|
|
new GNU programs. `doschk' also reports file names longer than 14
|
2530 |
|
|
characters.
|
2531 |
|
|
|
2532 |
|
|
|
2533 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: System Portability, Next: CPU Portability, Prev: Names, Up: Writing C
|
2534 |
|
|
|
2535 |
|
|
5.5 Portability between System Types
|
2536 |
|
|
====================================
|
2537 |
|
|
|
2538 |
|
|
In the Unix world, "portability" refers to porting to different Unix
|
2539 |
|
|
versions. For a GNU program, this kind of portability is desirable, but
|
2540 |
|
|
not paramount.
|
2541 |
|
|
|
2542 |
|
|
The primary purpose of GNU software is to run on top of the GNU
|
2543 |
|
|
kernel, compiled with the GNU C compiler, on various types of CPU. So
|
2544 |
|
|
the kinds of portability that are absolutely necessary are quite
|
2545 |
|
|
limited. But it is important to support Linux-based GNU systems, since
|
2546 |
|
|
they are the form of GNU that is popular.
|
2547 |
|
|
|
2548 |
|
|
Beyond that, it is good to support the other free operating systems
|
2549 |
|
|
(*BSD), and it is nice to support other Unix-like systems if you want
|
2550 |
|
|
to. Supporting a variety of Unix-like systems is desirable, although
|
2551 |
|
|
not paramount. It is usually not too hard, so you may as well do it.
|
2552 |
|
|
But you don't have to consider it an obligation, if it does turn out to
|
2553 |
|
|
be hard.
|
2554 |
|
|
|
2555 |
|
|
The easiest way to achieve portability to most Unix-like systems is
|
2556 |
|
|
to use Autoconf. It's unlikely that your program needs to know more
|
2557 |
|
|
information about the host platform than Autoconf can provide, simply
|
2558 |
|
|
because most of the programs that need such knowledge have already been
|
2559 |
|
|
written.
|
2560 |
|
|
|
2561 |
|
|
Avoid using the format of semi-internal data bases (e.g.,
|
2562 |
|
|
directories) when there is a higher-level alternative (`readdir').
|
2563 |
|
|
|
2564 |
|
|
As for systems that are not like Unix, such as MSDOS, Windows, VMS,
|
2565 |
|
|
MVS, and older Macintosh systems, supporting them is often a lot of
|
2566 |
|
|
work. When that is the case, it is better to spend your time adding
|
2567 |
|
|
features that will be useful on GNU and GNU/Linux, rather than on
|
2568 |
|
|
supporting other incompatible systems.
|
2569 |
|
|
|
2570 |
|
|
If you do support Windows, please do not abbreviate it as "win". In
|
2571 |
|
|
hacker terminology, calling something a "win" is a form of praise.
|
2572 |
|
|
You're free to praise Microsoft Windows on your own if you want, but
|
2573 |
|
|
please don't do this in GNU packages. Instead of abbreviating
|
2574 |
|
|
"Windows" to "un", you can write it in full or abbreviate it to "woe"
|
2575 |
|
|
or "w". In GNU Emacs, for instance, we use `w32' in file names of
|
2576 |
|
|
Windows-specific files, but the macro for Windows conditionals is
|
2577 |
|
|
called `WINDOWSNT'.
|
2578 |
|
|
|
2579 |
|
|
It is a good idea to define the "feature test macro" `_GNU_SOURCE'
|
2580 |
|
|
when compiling your C files. When you compile on GNU or GNU/Linux,
|
2581 |
|
|
this will enable the declarations of GNU library extension functions,
|
2582 |
|
|
and that will usually give you a compiler error message if you define
|
2583 |
|
|
the same function names in some other way in your program. (You don't
|
2584 |
|
|
have to actually _use_ these functions, if you prefer to make the
|
2585 |
|
|
program more portable to other systems.)
|
2586 |
|
|
|
2587 |
|
|
But whether or not you use these GNU extensions, you should avoid
|
2588 |
|
|
using their names for any other meanings. Doing so would make it hard
|
2589 |
|
|
to move your code into other GNU programs.
|
2590 |
|
|
|
2591 |
|
|
|
2592 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: CPU Portability, Next: System Functions, Prev: System Portability, Up: Writing C
|
2593 |
|
|
|
2594 |
|
|
5.6 Portability between CPUs
|
2595 |
|
|
============================
|
2596 |
|
|
|
2597 |
|
|
Even GNU systems will differ because of differences among CPU
|
2598 |
|
|
types--for example, difference in byte ordering and alignment
|
2599 |
|
|
requirements. It is absolutely essential to handle these differences.
|
2600 |
|
|
However, don't make any effort to cater to the possibility that an
|
2601 |
|
|
`int' will be less than 32 bits. We don't support 16-bit machines in
|
2602 |
|
|
GNU.
|
2603 |
|
|
|
2604 |
|
|
Similarly, don't make any effort to cater to the possibility that
|
2605 |
|
|
`long' will be smaller than predefined types like `size_t'. For
|
2606 |
|
|
example, the following code is ok:
|
2607 |
|
|
|
2608 |
|
|
printf ("size = %lu\n", (unsigned long) sizeof array);
|
2609 |
|
|
printf ("diff = %ld\n", (long) (pointer2 - pointer1));
|
2610 |
|
|
|
2611 |
|
|
1989 Standard C requires this to work, and we know of only one
|
2612 |
|
|
counterexample: 64-bit programs on Microsoft Windows. We will leave it
|
2613 |
|
|
to those who want to port GNU programs to that environment to figure
|
2614 |
|
|
out how to do it.
|
2615 |
|
|
|
2616 |
|
|
Predefined file-size types like `off_t' are an exception: they are
|
2617 |
|
|
longer than `long' on many platforms, so code like the above won't work
|
2618 |
|
|
with them. One way to print an `off_t' value portably is to print its
|
2619 |
|
|
digits yourself, one by one.
|
2620 |
|
|
|
2621 |
|
|
Don't assume that the address of an `int' object is also the address
|
2622 |
|
|
of its least-significant byte. This is false on big-endian machines.
|
2623 |
|
|
Thus, don't make the following mistake:
|
2624 |
|
|
|
2625 |
|
|
int c;
|
2626 |
|
|
...
|
2627 |
|
|
while ((c = getchar ()) != EOF)
|
2628 |
|
|
write (file_descriptor, &c, 1);
|
2629 |
|
|
|
2630 |
|
|
Instead, use `unsigned char' as follows. (The `unsigned' is for
|
2631 |
|
|
portability to unusual systems where `char' is signed and where there
|
2632 |
|
|
is integer overflow checking.)
|
2633 |
|
|
|
2634 |
|
|
int c;
|
2635 |
|
|
while ((c = getchar ()) != EOF)
|
2636 |
|
|
{
|
2637 |
|
|
unsigned char u = c;
|
2638 |
|
|
write (file_descriptor, &u, 1);
|
2639 |
|
|
}
|
2640 |
|
|
|
2641 |
|
|
It used to be ok to not worry about the difference between pointers
|
2642 |
|
|
and integers when passing arguments to functions. However, on most
|
2643 |
|
|
modern 64-bit machines pointers are wider than `int'. Conversely,
|
2644 |
|
|
integer types like `long long int' and `off_t' are wider than pointers
|
2645 |
|
|
on most modern 32-bit machines. Hence it's often better nowadays to
|
2646 |
|
|
use prototypes to define functions whose argument types are not trivial.
|
2647 |
|
|
|
2648 |
|
|
In particular, if functions accept varying argument counts or types
|
2649 |
|
|
they should be declared using prototypes containing `...' and defined
|
2650 |
|
|
using `stdarg.h'. For an example of this, please see the Gnulib
|
2651 |
|
|
(http://www.gnu.org/software/gnulib/) error module, which declares and
|
2652 |
|
|
defines the following function:
|
2653 |
|
|
|
2654 |
|
|
/* Print a message with `fprintf (stderr, FORMAT, ...)';
|
2655 |
|
|
if ERRNUM is nonzero, follow it with ": " and strerror (ERRNUM).
|
2656 |
|
|
If STATUS is nonzero, terminate the program with `exit (STATUS)'. */
|
2657 |
|
|
|
2658 |
|
|
void error (int status, int errnum, const char *format, ...);
|
2659 |
|
|
|
2660 |
|
|
A simple way to use the Gnulib error module is to obtain the two
|
2661 |
|
|
source files `error.c' and `error.h' from the Gnulib library source
|
2662 |
|
|
code repository at
|
2663 |
|
|
`http://savannah.gnu.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs/gnulib/gnulib/lib/'. Here's a
|
2664 |
|
|
sample use:
|
2665 |
|
|
|
2666 |
|
|
#include "error.h"
|
2667 |
|
|
#include
|
2668 |
|
|
#include
|
2669 |
|
|
|
2670 |
|
|
char *program_name = "myprogram";
|
2671 |
|
|
|
2672 |
|
|
FILE *
|
2673 |
|
|
xfopen (char const *name)
|
2674 |
|
|
{
|
2675 |
|
|
FILE *fp = fopen (name, "r");
|
2676 |
|
|
if (! fp)
|
2677 |
|
|
error (1, errno, "cannot read %s", name);
|
2678 |
|
|
return fp;
|
2679 |
|
|
}
|
2680 |
|
|
|
2681 |
|
|
Avoid casting pointers to integers if you can. Such casts greatly
|
2682 |
|
|
reduce portability, and in most programs they are easy to avoid. In the
|
2683 |
|
|
cases where casting pointers to integers is essential--such as, a Lisp
|
2684 |
|
|
interpreter which stores type information as well as an address in one
|
2685 |
|
|
word--you'll have to make explicit provisions to handle different word
|
2686 |
|
|
sizes. You will also need to make provision for systems in which the
|
2687 |
|
|
normal range of addresses you can get from `malloc' starts far away
|
2688 |
|
|
from zero.
|
2689 |
|
|
|
2690 |
|
|
|
2691 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: System Functions, Next: Internationalization, Prev: CPU Portability, Up: Writing C
|
2692 |
|
|
|
2693 |
|
|
5.7 Calling System Functions
|
2694 |
|
|
============================
|
2695 |
|
|
|
2696 |
|
|
C implementations differ substantially. Standard C reduces but does
|
2697 |
|
|
not eliminate the incompatibilities; meanwhile, many GNU packages still
|
2698 |
|
|
support pre-standard compilers because this is not hard to do. This
|
2699 |
|
|
chapter gives recommendations for how to use the more-or-less standard C
|
2700 |
|
|
library functions to avoid unnecessary loss of portability.
|
2701 |
|
|
|
2702 |
|
|
* Don't use the return value of `sprintf'. It returns the number of
|
2703 |
|
|
characters written on some systems, but not on all systems.
|
2704 |
|
|
|
2705 |
|
|
* Be aware that `vfprintf' is not always available.
|
2706 |
|
|
|
2707 |
|
|
* `main' should be declared to return type `int'. It should
|
2708 |
|
|
terminate either by calling `exit' or by returning the integer
|
2709 |
|
|
status code; make sure it cannot ever return an undefined value.
|
2710 |
|
|
|
2711 |
|
|
* Don't declare system functions explicitly.
|
2712 |
|
|
|
2713 |
|
|
Almost any declaration for a system function is wrong on some
|
2714 |
|
|
system. To minimize conflicts, leave it to the system header
|
2715 |
|
|
files to declare system functions. If the headers don't declare a
|
2716 |
|
|
function, let it remain undeclared.
|
2717 |
|
|
|
2718 |
|
|
While it may seem unclean to use a function without declaring it,
|
2719 |
|
|
in practice this works fine for most system library functions on
|
2720 |
|
|
the systems where this really happens; thus, the disadvantage is
|
2721 |
|
|
only theoretical. By contrast, actual declarations have
|
2722 |
|
|
frequently caused actual conflicts.
|
2723 |
|
|
|
2724 |
|
|
* If you must declare a system function, don't specify the argument
|
2725 |
|
|
types. Use an old-style declaration, not a Standard C prototype.
|
2726 |
|
|
The more you specify about the function, the more likely a
|
2727 |
|
|
conflict.
|
2728 |
|
|
|
2729 |
|
|
* In particular, don't unconditionally declare `malloc' or `realloc'.
|
2730 |
|
|
|
2731 |
|
|
Most GNU programs use those functions just once, in functions
|
2732 |
|
|
conventionally named `xmalloc' and `xrealloc'. These functions
|
2733 |
|
|
call `malloc' and `realloc', respectively, and check the results.
|
2734 |
|
|
|
2735 |
|
|
Because `xmalloc' and `xrealloc' are defined in your program, you
|
2736 |
|
|
can declare them in other files without any risk of type conflict.
|
2737 |
|
|
|
2738 |
|
|
On most systems, `int' is the same length as a pointer; thus, the
|
2739 |
|
|
calls to `malloc' and `realloc' work fine. For the few
|
2740 |
|
|
exceptional systems (mostly 64-bit machines), you can use
|
2741 |
|
|
*conditionalized* declarations of `malloc' and `realloc'--or put
|
2742 |
|
|
these declarations in configuration files specific to those
|
2743 |
|
|
systems.
|
2744 |
|
|
|
2745 |
|
|
* The string functions require special treatment. Some Unix systems
|
2746 |
|
|
have a header file `string.h'; others have `strings.h'. Neither
|
2747 |
|
|
file name is portable. There are two things you can do: use
|
2748 |
|
|
Autoconf to figure out which file to include, or don't include
|
2749 |
|
|
either file.
|
2750 |
|
|
|
2751 |
|
|
* If you don't include either strings file, you can't get
|
2752 |
|
|
declarations for the string functions from the header file in the
|
2753 |
|
|
usual way.
|
2754 |
|
|
|
2755 |
|
|
That causes less of a problem than you might think. The newer
|
2756 |
|
|
standard string functions should be avoided anyway because many
|
2757 |
|
|
systems still don't support them. The string functions you can
|
2758 |
|
|
use are these:
|
2759 |
|
|
|
2760 |
|
|
strcpy strncpy strcat strncat
|
2761 |
|
|
strlen strcmp strncmp
|
2762 |
|
|
strchr strrchr
|
2763 |
|
|
|
2764 |
|
|
The copy and concatenate functions work fine without a declaration
|
2765 |
|
|
as long as you don't use their values. Using their values without
|
2766 |
|
|
a declaration fails on systems where the width of a pointer
|
2767 |
|
|
differs from the width of `int', and perhaps in other cases. It
|
2768 |
|
|
is trivial to avoid using their values, so do that.
|
2769 |
|
|
|
2770 |
|
|
The compare functions and `strlen' work fine without a declaration
|
2771 |
|
|
on most systems, possibly all the ones that GNU software runs on.
|
2772 |
|
|
You may find it necessary to declare them *conditionally* on a few
|
2773 |
|
|
systems.
|
2774 |
|
|
|
2775 |
|
|
The search functions must be declared to return `char *'. Luckily,
|
2776 |
|
|
there is no variation in the data type they return. But there is
|
2777 |
|
|
variation in their names. Some systems give these functions the
|
2778 |
|
|
names `index' and `rindex'; other systems use the names `strchr'
|
2779 |
|
|
and `strrchr'. Some systems support both pairs of names, but
|
2780 |
|
|
neither pair works on all systems.
|
2781 |
|
|
|
2782 |
|
|
You should pick a single pair of names and use it throughout your
|
2783 |
|
|
program. (Nowadays, it is better to choose `strchr' and `strrchr'
|
2784 |
|
|
for new programs, since those are the standard names.) Declare
|
2785 |
|
|
both of those names as functions returning `char *'. On systems
|
2786 |
|
|
which don't support those names, define them as macros in terms of
|
2787 |
|
|
the other pair. For example, here is what to put at the beginning
|
2788 |
|
|
of your file (or in a header) if you want to use the names
|
2789 |
|
|
`strchr' and `strrchr' throughout:
|
2790 |
|
|
|
2791 |
|
|
#ifndef HAVE_STRCHR
|
2792 |
|
|
#define strchr index
|
2793 |
|
|
#endif
|
2794 |
|
|
#ifndef HAVE_STRRCHR
|
2795 |
|
|
#define strrchr rindex
|
2796 |
|
|
#endif
|
2797 |
|
|
|
2798 |
|
|
char *strchr ();
|
2799 |
|
|
char *strrchr ();
|
2800 |
|
|
|
2801 |
|
|
Here we assume that `HAVE_STRCHR' and `HAVE_STRRCHR' are macros
|
2802 |
|
|
defined in systems where the corresponding functions exist. One way to
|
2803 |
|
|
get them properly defined is to use Autoconf.
|
2804 |
|
|
|
2805 |
|
|
|
2806 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Internationalization, Next: Character Set, Prev: System Functions, Up: Writing C
|
2807 |
|
|
|
2808 |
|
|
5.8 Internationalization
|
2809 |
|
|
========================
|
2810 |
|
|
|
2811 |
|
|
GNU has a library called GNU gettext that makes it easy to translate the
|
2812 |
|
|
messages in a program into various languages. You should use this
|
2813 |
|
|
library in every program. Use English for the messages as they appear
|
2814 |
|
|
in the program, and let gettext provide the way to translate them into
|
2815 |
|
|
other languages.
|
2816 |
|
|
|
2817 |
|
|
Using GNU gettext involves putting a call to the `gettext' macro
|
2818 |
|
|
around each string that might need translation--like this:
|
2819 |
|
|
|
2820 |
|
|
printf (gettext ("Processing file `%s'..."));
|
2821 |
|
|
|
2822 |
|
|
This permits GNU gettext to replace the string `"Processing file
|
2823 |
|
|
`%s'..."' with a translated version.
|
2824 |
|
|
|
2825 |
|
|
Once a program uses gettext, please make a point of writing calls to
|
2826 |
|
|
`gettext' when you add new strings that call for translation.
|
2827 |
|
|
|
2828 |
|
|
Using GNU gettext in a package involves specifying a "text domain
|
2829 |
|
|
name" for the package. The text domain name is used to separate the
|
2830 |
|
|
translations for this package from the translations for other packages.
|
2831 |
|
|
Normally, the text domain name should be the same as the name of the
|
2832 |
|
|
package--for example, `coreutils' for the GNU core utilities.
|
2833 |
|
|
|
2834 |
|
|
To enable gettext to work well, avoid writing code that makes
|
2835 |
|
|
assumptions about the structure of words or sentences. When you want
|
2836 |
|
|
the precise text of a sentence to vary depending on the data, use two or
|
2837 |
|
|
more alternative string constants each containing a complete sentences,
|
2838 |
|
|
rather than inserting conditionalized words or phrases into a single
|
2839 |
|
|
sentence framework.
|
2840 |
|
|
|
2841 |
|
|
Here is an example of what not to do:
|
2842 |
|
|
|
2843 |
|
|
printf ("%s is full", capacity > 5000000 ? "disk" : "floppy disk");
|
2844 |
|
|
|
2845 |
|
|
If you apply gettext to all strings, like this,
|
2846 |
|
|
|
2847 |
|
|
printf (gettext ("%s is full"),
|
2848 |
|
|
capacity > 5000000 ? gettext ("disk") : gettext ("floppy disk"));
|
2849 |
|
|
|
2850 |
|
|
the translator will hardly know that "disk" and "floppy disk" are meant
|
2851 |
|
|
to be substituted in the other string. Worse, in some languages (like
|
2852 |
|
|
French) the construction will not work: the translation of the word
|
2853 |
|
|
"full" depends on the gender of the first part of the sentence; it
|
2854 |
|
|
happens to be not the same for "disk" as for "floppy disk".
|
2855 |
|
|
|
2856 |
|
|
Complete sentences can be translated without problems:
|
2857 |
|
|
|
2858 |
|
|
printf (capacity > 5000000 ? gettext ("disk is full")
|
2859 |
|
|
: gettext ("floppy disk is full"));
|
2860 |
|
|
|
2861 |
|
|
A similar problem appears at the level of sentence structure with
|
2862 |
|
|
this code:
|
2863 |
|
|
|
2864 |
|
|
printf ("# Implicit rule search has%s been done.\n",
|
2865 |
|
|
f->tried_implicit ? "" : " not");
|
2866 |
|
|
|
2867 |
|
|
Adding `gettext' calls to this code cannot give correct results for all
|
2868 |
|
|
languages, because negation in some languages requires adding words at
|
2869 |
|
|
more than one place in the sentence. By contrast, adding `gettext'
|
2870 |
|
|
calls does the job straightforwardly if the code starts out like this:
|
2871 |
|
|
|
2872 |
|
|
printf (f->tried_implicit
|
2873 |
|
|
? "# Implicit rule search has been done.\n",
|
2874 |
|
|
: "# Implicit rule search has not been done.\n");
|
2875 |
|
|
|
2876 |
|
|
Another example is this one:
|
2877 |
|
|
|
2878 |
|
|
printf ("%d file%s processed", nfiles,
|
2879 |
|
|
nfiles != 1 ? "s" : "");
|
2880 |
|
|
|
2881 |
|
|
The problem with this example is that it assumes that plurals are made
|
2882 |
|
|
by adding `s'. If you apply gettext to the format string, like this,
|
2883 |
|
|
|
2884 |
|
|
printf (gettext ("%d file%s processed"), nfiles,
|
2885 |
|
|
nfiles != 1 ? "s" : "");
|
2886 |
|
|
|
2887 |
|
|
the message can use different words, but it will still be forced to use
|
2888 |
|
|
`s' for the plural. Here is a better way, with gettext being applied to
|
2889 |
|
|
the two strings independently:
|
2890 |
|
|
|
2891 |
|
|
printf ((nfiles != 1 ? gettext ("%d files processed")
|
2892 |
|
|
: gettext ("%d file processed")),
|
2893 |
|
|
nfiles);
|
2894 |
|
|
|
2895 |
|
|
But this still doesn't work for languages like Polish, which has three
|
2896 |
|
|
plural forms: one for nfiles == 1, one for nfiles == 2, 3, 4, 22, 23,
|
2897 |
|
|
24, ... and one for the rest. The GNU `ngettext' function solves this
|
2898 |
|
|
problem:
|
2899 |
|
|
|
2900 |
|
|
printf (ngettext ("%d files processed", "%d file processed", nfiles),
|
2901 |
|
|
nfiles);
|
2902 |
|
|
|
2903 |
|
|
|
2904 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Character Set, Next: Quote Characters, Prev: Internationalization, Up: Writing C
|
2905 |
|
|
|
2906 |
|
|
5.9 Character Set
|
2907 |
|
|
=================
|
2908 |
|
|
|
2909 |
|
|
Sticking to the ASCII character set (plain text, 7-bit characters) is
|
2910 |
|
|
preferred in GNU source code comments, text documents, and other
|
2911 |
|
|
contexts, unless there is good reason to do something else because of
|
2912 |
|
|
the application domain. For example, if source code deals with the
|
2913 |
|
|
French Revolutionary calendar, it is OK if its literal strings contain
|
2914 |
|
|
accented characters in month names like "Flore'al". Also, it is OK to
|
2915 |
|
|
use non-ASCII characters to represent proper names of contributors in
|
2916 |
|
|
change logs (*note Change Logs::).
|
2917 |
|
|
|
2918 |
|
|
If you need to use non-ASCII characters, you should normally stick
|
2919 |
|
|
with one encoding, as one cannot in general mix encodings reliably.
|
2920 |
|
|
|
2921 |
|
|
|
2922 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Quote Characters, Next: Mmap, Prev: Character Set, Up: Writing C
|
2923 |
|
|
|
2924 |
|
|
5.10 Quote Characters
|
2925 |
|
|
=====================
|
2926 |
|
|
|
2927 |
|
|
In the C locale, GNU programs should stick to plain ASCII for quotation
|
2928 |
|
|
characters in messages to users: preferably 0x60 (``') for left quotes
|
2929 |
|
|
and 0x27 (`'') for right quotes. It is ok, but not required, to use
|
2930 |
|
|
locale-specific quotes in other locales.
|
2931 |
|
|
|
2932 |
|
|
The Gnulib (http://www.gnu.org/software/gnulib/) `quote' and
|
2933 |
|
|
`quotearg' modules provide a reasonably straightforward way to support
|
2934 |
|
|
locale-specific quote characters, as well as taking care of other
|
2935 |
|
|
issues, such as quoting a filename that itself contains a quote
|
2936 |
|
|
character. See the Gnulib documentation for usage details.
|
2937 |
|
|
|
2938 |
|
|
In any case, the documentation for your program should clearly
|
2939 |
|
|
specify how it does quoting, if different than the preferred method of
|
2940 |
|
|
``' and `''. This is especially important if the output of your
|
2941 |
|
|
program is ever likely to be parsed by another program.
|
2942 |
|
|
|
2943 |
|
|
Quotation characters are a difficult area in the computing world at
|
2944 |
|
|
this time: there are no true left or right quote characters in Latin1;
|
2945 |
|
|
the ``' character we use was standardized there as a grave accent.
|
2946 |
|
|
Moreover, Latin1 is still not universally usable.
|
2947 |
|
|
|
2948 |
|
|
Unicode contains the unambiguous quote characters required, and its
|
2949 |
|
|
common encoding UTF-8 is upward compatible with Latin1. However,
|
2950 |
|
|
Unicode and UTF-8 are not universally well-supported, either.
|
2951 |
|
|
|
2952 |
|
|
This may change over the next few years, and then we will revisit
|
2953 |
|
|
this.
|
2954 |
|
|
|
2955 |
|
|
|
2956 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Mmap, Prev: Quote Characters, Up: Writing C
|
2957 |
|
|
|
2958 |
|
|
5.11 Mmap
|
2959 |
|
|
=========
|
2960 |
|
|
|
2961 |
|
|
Don't assume that `mmap' either works on all files or fails for all
|
2962 |
|
|
files. It may work on some files and fail on others.
|
2963 |
|
|
|
2964 |
|
|
The proper way to use `mmap' is to try it on the specific file for
|
2965 |
|
|
which you want to use it--and if `mmap' doesn't work, fall back on
|
2966 |
|
|
doing the job in another way using `read' and `write'.
|
2967 |
|
|
|
2968 |
|
|
The reason this precaution is needed is that the GNU kernel (the
|
2969 |
|
|
HURD) provides a user-extensible file system, in which there can be many
|
2970 |
|
|
different kinds of "ordinary files." Many of them support `mmap', but
|
2971 |
|
|
some do not. It is important to make programs handle all these kinds
|
2972 |
|
|
of files.
|
2973 |
|
|
|
2974 |
|
|
|
2975 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Documentation, Next: Managing Releases, Prev: Writing C, Up: Top
|
2976 |
|
|
|
2977 |
|
|
6 Documenting Programs
|
2978 |
|
|
**********************
|
2979 |
|
|
|
2980 |
|
|
A GNU program should ideally come with full free documentation, adequate
|
2981 |
|
|
for both reference and tutorial purposes. If the package can be
|
2982 |
|
|
programmed or extended, the documentation should cover programming or
|
2983 |
|
|
extending it, as well as just using it.
|
2984 |
|
|
|
2985 |
|
|
* Menu:
|
2986 |
|
|
|
2987 |
|
|
* GNU Manuals:: Writing proper manuals.
|
2988 |
|
|
* Doc Strings and Manuals:: Compiling doc strings doesn't make a manual.
|
2989 |
|
|
* Manual Structure Details:: Specific structure conventions.
|
2990 |
|
|
* License for Manuals:: Writing the distribution terms for a manual.
|
2991 |
|
|
* Manual Credits:: Giving credit to documentation contributors.
|
2992 |
|
|
* Printed Manuals:: Mentioning the printed manual.
|
2993 |
|
|
* NEWS File:: NEWS files supplement manuals.
|
2994 |
|
|
* Change Logs:: Recording changes.
|
2995 |
|
|
* Man Pages:: Man pages are secondary.
|
2996 |
|
|
* Reading other Manuals:: How far you can go in learning
|
2997 |
|
|
from other manuals.
|
2998 |
|
|
|
2999 |
|
|
|
3000 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: GNU Manuals, Next: Doc Strings and Manuals, Up: Documentation
|
3001 |
|
|
|
3002 |
|
|
6.1 GNU Manuals
|
3003 |
|
|
===============
|
3004 |
|
|
|
3005 |
|
|
The preferred document format for the GNU system is the Texinfo
|
3006 |
|
|
formatting language. Every GNU package should (ideally) have
|
3007 |
|
|
documentation in Texinfo both for reference and for learners. Texinfo
|
3008 |
|
|
makes it possible to produce a good quality formatted book, using TeX,
|
3009 |
|
|
and to generate an Info file. It is also possible to generate HTML
|
3010 |
|
|
output from Texinfo source. See the Texinfo manual, either the
|
3011 |
|
|
hardcopy, or the on-line version available through `info' or the Emacs
|
3012 |
|
|
Info subsystem (`C-h i').
|
3013 |
|
|
|
3014 |
|
|
Nowadays some other formats such as Docbook and Sgmltexi can be
|
3015 |
|
|
converted automatically into Texinfo. It is ok to produce the Texinfo
|
3016 |
|
|
documentation by conversion this way, as long as it gives good results.
|
3017 |
|
|
|
3018 |
|
|
Make sure your manual is clear to a reader who knows nothing about
|
3019 |
|
|
the topic and reads it straight through. This means covering basic
|
3020 |
|
|
topics at the beginning, and advanced topics only later. This also
|
3021 |
|
|
means defining every specialized term when it is first used.
|
3022 |
|
|
|
3023 |
|
|
Programmers tend to carry over the structure of the program as the
|
3024 |
|
|
structure for its documentation. But this structure is not necessarily
|
3025 |
|
|
good for explaining how to use the program; it may be irrelevant and
|
3026 |
|
|
confusing for a user.
|
3027 |
|
|
|
3028 |
|
|
Instead, the right way to structure documentation is according to the
|
3029 |
|
|
concepts and questions that a user will have in mind when reading it.
|
3030 |
|
|
This principle applies at every level, from the lowest (ordering
|
3031 |
|
|
sentences in a paragraph) to the highest (ordering of chapter topics
|
3032 |
|
|
within the manual). Sometimes this structure of ideas matches the
|
3033 |
|
|
structure of the implementation of the software being documented--but
|
3034 |
|
|
often they are different. An important part of learning to write good
|
3035 |
|
|
documentation is to learn to notice when you have unthinkingly
|
3036 |
|
|
structured the documentation like the implementation, stop yourself,
|
3037 |
|
|
and look for better alternatives.
|
3038 |
|
|
|
3039 |
|
|
For example, each program in the GNU system probably ought to be
|
3040 |
|
|
documented in one manual; but this does not mean each program should
|
3041 |
|
|
have its own manual. That would be following the structure of the
|
3042 |
|
|
implementation, rather than the structure that helps the user
|
3043 |
|
|
understand.
|
3044 |
|
|
|
3045 |
|
|
Instead, each manual should cover a coherent _topic_. For example,
|
3046 |
|
|
instead of a manual for `diff' and a manual for `diff3', we have one
|
3047 |
|
|
manual for "comparison of files" which covers both of those programs,
|
3048 |
|
|
as well as `cmp'. By documenting these programs together, we can make
|
3049 |
|
|
the whole subject clearer.
|
3050 |
|
|
|
3051 |
|
|
The manual which discusses a program should certainly document all of
|
3052 |
|
|
the program's command-line options and all of its commands. It should
|
3053 |
|
|
give examples of their use. But don't organize the manual as a list of
|
3054 |
|
|
features. Instead, organize it logically, by subtopics. Address the
|
3055 |
|
|
questions that a user will ask when thinking about the job that the
|
3056 |
|
|
program does. Don't just tell the reader what each feature can do--say
|
3057 |
|
|
what jobs it is good for, and show how to use it for those jobs.
|
3058 |
|
|
Explain what is recommended usage, and what kinds of usage users should
|
3059 |
|
|
avoid.
|
3060 |
|
|
|
3061 |
|
|
In general, a GNU manual should serve both as tutorial and reference.
|
3062 |
|
|
It should be set up for convenient access to each topic through Info,
|
3063 |
|
|
and for reading straight through (appendixes aside). A GNU manual
|
3064 |
|
|
should give a good introduction to a beginner reading through from the
|
3065 |
|
|
start, and should also provide all the details that hackers want. The
|
3066 |
|
|
Bison manual is a good example of this--please take a look at it to see
|
3067 |
|
|
what we mean.
|
3068 |
|
|
|
3069 |
|
|
That is not as hard as it first sounds. Arrange each chapter as a
|
3070 |
|
|
logical breakdown of its topic, but order the sections, and write their
|
3071 |
|
|
text, so that reading the chapter straight through makes sense. Do
|
3072 |
|
|
likewise when structuring the book into chapters, and when structuring a
|
3073 |
|
|
section into paragraphs. The watchword is, _at each point, address the
|
3074 |
|
|
most fundamental and important issue raised by the preceding text._
|
3075 |
|
|
|
3076 |
|
|
If necessary, add extra chapters at the beginning of the manual which
|
3077 |
|
|
are purely tutorial and cover the basics of the subject. These provide
|
3078 |
|
|
the framework for a beginner to understand the rest of the manual. The
|
3079 |
|
|
Bison manual provides a good example of how to do this.
|
3080 |
|
|
|
3081 |
|
|
To serve as a reference, a manual should have an Index that list all
|
3082 |
|
|
the functions, variables, options, and important concepts that are part
|
3083 |
|
|
of the program. One combined Index should do for a short manual, but
|
3084 |
|
|
sometimes for a complex package it is better to use multiple indices.
|
3085 |
|
|
The Texinfo manual includes advice on preparing good index entries, see
|
3086 |
|
|
*Note Making Index Entries: (texinfo)Index Entries, and see *Note
|
3087 |
|
|
Defining the Entries of an Index: (texinfo)Indexing Commands.
|
3088 |
|
|
|
3089 |
|
|
Don't use Unix man pages as a model for how to write GNU
|
3090 |
|
|
documentation; most of them are terse, badly structured, and give
|
3091 |
|
|
inadequate explanation of the underlying concepts. (There are, of
|
3092 |
|
|
course, some exceptions.) Also, Unix man pages use a particular format
|
3093 |
|
|
which is different from what we use in GNU manuals.
|
3094 |
|
|
|
3095 |
|
|
Please include an email address in the manual for where to report
|
3096 |
|
|
bugs _in the text of the manual_.
|
3097 |
|
|
|
3098 |
|
|
Please do not use the term "pathname" that is used in Unix
|
3099 |
|
|
documentation; use "file name" (two words) instead. We use the term
|
3100 |
|
|
"path" only for search paths, which are lists of directory names.
|
3101 |
|
|
|
3102 |
|
|
Please do not use the term "illegal" to refer to erroneous input to
|
3103 |
|
|
a computer program. Please use "invalid" for this, and reserve the
|
3104 |
|
|
term "illegal" for activities prohibited by law.
|
3105 |
|
|
|
3106 |
|
|
Please do not write `()' after a function name just to indicate it
|
3107 |
|
|
is a function. `foo ()' is not a function, it is a function call with
|
3108 |
|
|
no arguments.
|
3109 |
|
|
|
3110 |
|
|
|
3111 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Doc Strings and Manuals, Next: Manual Structure Details, Prev: GNU Manuals, Up: Documentation
|
3112 |
|
|
|
3113 |
|
|
6.2 Doc Strings and Manuals
|
3114 |
|
|
===========================
|
3115 |
|
|
|
3116 |
|
|
Some programming systems, such as Emacs, provide a documentation string
|
3117 |
|
|
for each function, command or variable. You may be tempted to write a
|
3118 |
|
|
reference manual by compiling the documentation strings and writing a
|
3119 |
|
|
little additional text to go around them--but you must not do it. That
|
3120 |
|
|
approach is a fundamental mistake. The text of well-written
|
3121 |
|
|
documentation strings will be entirely wrong for a manual.
|
3122 |
|
|
|
3123 |
|
|
A documentation string needs to stand alone--when it appears on the
|
3124 |
|
|
screen, there will be no other text to introduce or explain it.
|
3125 |
|
|
Meanwhile, it can be rather informal in style.
|
3126 |
|
|
|
3127 |
|
|
The text describing a function or variable in a manual must not stand
|
3128 |
|
|
alone; it appears in the context of a section or subsection. Other text
|
3129 |
|
|
at the beginning of the section should explain some of the concepts, and
|
3130 |
|
|
should often make some general points that apply to several functions or
|
3131 |
|
|
variables. The previous descriptions of functions and variables in the
|
3132 |
|
|
section will also have given information about the topic. A description
|
3133 |
|
|
written to stand alone would repeat some of that information; this
|
3134 |
|
|
redundancy looks bad. Meanwhile, the informality that is acceptable in
|
3135 |
|
|
a documentation string is totally unacceptable in a manual.
|
3136 |
|
|
|
3137 |
|
|
The only good way to use documentation strings in writing a good
|
3138 |
|
|
manual is to use them as a source of information for writing good text.
|
3139 |
|
|
|
3140 |
|
|
|
3141 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Manual Structure Details, Next: License for Manuals, Prev: Doc Strings and Manuals, Up: Documentation
|
3142 |
|
|
|
3143 |
|
|
6.3 Manual Structure Details
|
3144 |
|
|
============================
|
3145 |
|
|
|
3146 |
|
|
The title page of the manual should state the version of the programs or
|
3147 |
|
|
packages documented in the manual. The Top node of the manual should
|
3148 |
|
|
also contain this information. If the manual is changing more
|
3149 |
|
|
frequently than or independent of the program, also state a version
|
3150 |
|
|
number for the manual in both of these places.
|
3151 |
|
|
|
3152 |
|
|
Each program documented in the manual should have a node named
|
3153 |
|
|
`PROGRAM Invocation' or `Invoking PROGRAM'. This node (together with
|
3154 |
|
|
its subnodes, if any) should describe the program's command line
|
3155 |
|
|
arguments and how to run it (the sort of information people would look
|
3156 |
|
|
for in a man page). Start with an `@example' containing a template for
|
3157 |
|
|
all the options and arguments that the program uses.
|
3158 |
|
|
|
3159 |
|
|
Alternatively, put a menu item in some menu whose item name fits one
|
3160 |
|
|
of the above patterns. This identifies the node which that item points
|
3161 |
|
|
to as the node for this purpose, regardless of the node's actual name.
|
3162 |
|
|
|
3163 |
|
|
The `--usage' feature of the Info reader looks for such a node or
|
3164 |
|
|
menu item in order to find the relevant text, so it is essential for
|
3165 |
|
|
every Texinfo file to have one.
|
3166 |
|
|
|
3167 |
|
|
If one manual describes several programs, it should have such a node
|
3168 |
|
|
for each program described in the manual.
|
3169 |
|
|
|
3170 |
|
|
|
3171 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: License for Manuals, Next: Manual Credits, Prev: Manual Structure Details, Up: Documentation
|
3172 |
|
|
|
3173 |
|
|
6.4 License for Manuals
|
3174 |
|
|
=======================
|
3175 |
|
|
|
3176 |
|
|
Please use the GNU Free Documentation License for all GNU manuals that
|
3177 |
|
|
are more than a few pages long. Likewise for a collection of short
|
3178 |
|
|
documents--you only need one copy of the GNU FDL for the whole
|
3179 |
|
|
collection. For a single short document, you can use a very permissive
|
3180 |
|
|
non-copyleft license, to avoid taking up space with a long license.
|
3181 |
|
|
|
3182 |
|
|
See `http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/fdl-howto.html' for more explanation
|
3183 |
|
|
of how to employ the GFDL.
|
3184 |
|
|
|
3185 |
|
|
Note that it is not obligatory to include a copy of the GNU GPL or
|
3186 |
|
|
GNU LGPL in a manual whose license is neither the GPL nor the LGPL. It
|
3187 |
|
|
can be a good idea to include the program's license in a large manual;
|
3188 |
|
|
in a short manual, whose size would be increased considerably by
|
3189 |
|
|
including the program's license, it is probably better not to include
|
3190 |
|
|
it.
|
3191 |
|
|
|
3192 |
|
|
|
3193 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Manual Credits, Next: Printed Manuals, Prev: License for Manuals, Up: Documentation
|
3194 |
|
|
|
3195 |
|
|
6.5 Manual Credits
|
3196 |
|
|
==================
|
3197 |
|
|
|
3198 |
|
|
Please credit the principal human writers of the manual as the authors,
|
3199 |
|
|
on the title page of the manual. If a company sponsored the work, thank
|
3200 |
|
|
the company in a suitable place in the manual, but do not cite the
|
3201 |
|
|
company as an author.
|
3202 |
|
|
|
3203 |
|
|
|
3204 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Printed Manuals, Next: NEWS File, Prev: Manual Credits, Up: Documentation
|
3205 |
|
|
|
3206 |
|
|
6.6 Printed Manuals
|
3207 |
|
|
===================
|
3208 |
|
|
|
3209 |
|
|
The FSF publishes some GNU manuals in printed form. To encourage sales
|
3210 |
|
|
of these manuals, the on-line versions of the manual should mention at
|
3211 |
|
|
the very start that the printed manual is available and should point at
|
3212 |
|
|
information for getting it--for instance, with a link to the page
|
3213 |
|
|
`http://www.gnu.org/order/order.html'. This should not be included in
|
3214 |
|
|
the printed manual, though, because there it is redundant.
|
3215 |
|
|
|
3216 |
|
|
It is also useful to explain in the on-line forms of the manual how
|
3217 |
|
|
the user can print out the manual from the sources.
|
3218 |
|
|
|
3219 |
|
|
|
3220 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: NEWS File, Next: Change Logs, Prev: Printed Manuals, Up: Documentation
|
3221 |
|
|
|
3222 |
|
|
6.7 The NEWS File
|
3223 |
|
|
=================
|
3224 |
|
|
|
3225 |
|
|
In addition to its manual, the package should have a file named `NEWS'
|
3226 |
|
|
which contains a list of user-visible changes worth mentioning. In
|
3227 |
|
|
each new release, add items to the front of the file and identify the
|
3228 |
|
|
version they pertain to. Don't discard old items; leave them in the
|
3229 |
|
|
file after the newer items. This way, a user upgrading from any
|
3230 |
|
|
previous version can see what is new.
|
3231 |
|
|
|
3232 |
|
|
If the `NEWS' file gets very long, move some of the older items into
|
3233 |
|
|
a file named `ONEWS' and put a note at the end referring the user to
|
3234 |
|
|
that file.
|
3235 |
|
|
|
3236 |
|
|
|
3237 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Change Logs, Next: Man Pages, Prev: NEWS File, Up: Documentation
|
3238 |
|
|
|
3239 |
|
|
6.8 Change Logs
|
3240 |
|
|
===============
|
3241 |
|
|
|
3242 |
|
|
Keep a change log to describe all the changes made to program source
|
3243 |
|
|
files. The purpose of this is so that people investigating bugs in the
|
3244 |
|
|
future will know about the changes that might have introduced the bug.
|
3245 |
|
|
Often a new bug can be found by looking at what was recently changed.
|
3246 |
|
|
More importantly, change logs can help you eliminate conceptual
|
3247 |
|
|
inconsistencies between different parts of a program, by giving you a
|
3248 |
|
|
history of how the conflicting concepts arose and who they came from.
|
3249 |
|
|
|
3250 |
|
|
* Menu:
|
3251 |
|
|
|
3252 |
|
|
* Change Log Concepts::
|
3253 |
|
|
* Style of Change Logs::
|
3254 |
|
|
* Simple Changes::
|
3255 |
|
|
* Conditional Changes::
|
3256 |
|
|
* Indicating the Part Changed::
|
3257 |
|
|
|
3258 |
|
|
|
3259 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Change Log Concepts, Next: Style of Change Logs, Up: Change Logs
|
3260 |
|
|
|
3261 |
|
|
6.8.1 Change Log Concepts
|
3262 |
|
|
-------------------------
|
3263 |
|
|
|
3264 |
|
|
You can think of the change log as a conceptual "undo list" which
|
3265 |
|
|
explains how earlier versions were different from the current version.
|
3266 |
|
|
People can see the current version; they don't need the change log to
|
3267 |
|
|
tell them what is in it. What they want from a change log is a clear
|
3268 |
|
|
explanation of how the earlier version differed.
|
3269 |
|
|
|
3270 |
|
|
The change log file is normally called `ChangeLog' and covers an
|
3271 |
|
|
entire directory. Each directory can have its own change log, or a
|
3272 |
|
|
directory can use the change log of its parent directory-it's up to you.
|
3273 |
|
|
|
3274 |
|
|
Another alternative is to record change log information with a
|
3275 |
|
|
version control system such as RCS or CVS. This can be converted
|
3276 |
|
|
automatically to a `ChangeLog' file using `rcs2log'; in Emacs, the
|
3277 |
|
|
command `C-x v a' (`vc-update-change-log') does the job.
|
3278 |
|
|
|
3279 |
|
|
There's no need to describe the full purpose of the changes or how
|
3280 |
|
|
they work together. If you think that a change calls for explanation,
|
3281 |
|
|
you're probably right. Please do explain it--but please put the
|
3282 |
|
|
explanation in comments in the code, where people will see it whenever
|
3283 |
|
|
they see the code. For example, "New function" is enough for the
|
3284 |
|
|
change log when you add a function, because there should be a comment
|
3285 |
|
|
before the function definition to explain what it does.
|
3286 |
|
|
|
3287 |
|
|
In the past, we recommended not mentioning changes in non-software
|
3288 |
|
|
files (manuals, help files, etc.) in change logs. However, we've been
|
3289 |
|
|
advised that it is a good idea to include them, for the sake of
|
3290 |
|
|
copyright records.
|
3291 |
|
|
|
3292 |
|
|
However, sometimes it is useful to write one line to describe the
|
3293 |
|
|
overall purpose of a batch of changes.
|
3294 |
|
|
|
3295 |
|
|
The easiest way to add an entry to `ChangeLog' is with the Emacs
|
3296 |
|
|
command `M-x add-change-log-entry'. An entry should have an asterisk,
|
3297 |
|
|
the name of the changed file, and then in parentheses the name of the
|
3298 |
|
|
changed functions, variables or whatever, followed by a colon. Then
|
3299 |
|
|
describe the changes you made to that function or variable.
|
3300 |
|
|
|
3301 |
|
|
|
3302 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Style of Change Logs, Next: Simple Changes, Prev: Change Log Concepts, Up: Change Logs
|
3303 |
|
|
|
3304 |
|
|
6.8.2 Style of Change Logs
|
3305 |
|
|
--------------------------
|
3306 |
|
|
|
3307 |
|
|
Here are some simple examples of change log entries, starting with the
|
3308 |
|
|
header line that says who made the change and when it was installed,
|
3309 |
|
|
followed by descriptions of specific changes. (These examples are
|
3310 |
|
|
drawn from Emacs and GCC.)
|
3311 |
|
|
|
3312 |
|
|
1998-08-17 Richard Stallman
|
3313 |
|
|
|
3314 |
|
|
* register.el (insert-register): Return nil.
|
3315 |
|
|
(jump-to-register): Likewise.
|
3316 |
|
|
|
3317 |
|
|
* sort.el (sort-subr): Return nil.
|
3318 |
|
|
|
3319 |
|
|
* tex-mode.el (tex-bibtex-file, tex-file, tex-region):
|
3320 |
|
|
Restart the tex shell if process is gone or stopped.
|
3321 |
|
|
(tex-shell-running): New function.
|
3322 |
|
|
|
3323 |
|
|
* expr.c (store_one_arg): Round size up for move_block_to_reg.
|
3324 |
|
|
(expand_call): Round up when emitting USE insns.
|
3325 |
|
|
* stmt.c (assign_parms): Round size up for move_block_from_reg.
|
3326 |
|
|
|
3327 |
|
|
It's important to name the changed function or variable in full.
|
3328 |
|
|
Don't abbreviate function or variable names, and don't combine them.
|
3329 |
|
|
Subsequent maintainers will often search for a function name to find all
|
3330 |
|
|
the change log entries that pertain to it; if you abbreviate the name,
|
3331 |
|
|
they won't find it when they search.
|
3332 |
|
|
|
3333 |
|
|
For example, some people are tempted to abbreviate groups of function
|
3334 |
|
|
names by writing `* register.el ({insert,jump-to}-register)'; this is
|
3335 |
|
|
not a good idea, since searching for `jump-to-register' or
|
3336 |
|
|
`insert-register' would not find that entry.
|
3337 |
|
|
|
3338 |
|
|
Separate unrelated change log entries with blank lines. When two
|
3339 |
|
|
entries represent parts of the same change, so that they work together,
|
3340 |
|
|
then don't put blank lines between them. Then you can omit the file
|
3341 |
|
|
name and the asterisk when successive entries are in the same file.
|
3342 |
|
|
|
3343 |
|
|
Break long lists of function names by closing continued lines with
|
3344 |
|
|
`)', rather than `,', and opening the continuation with `(' as in this
|
3345 |
|
|
example:
|
3346 |
|
|
|
3347 |
|
|
* keyboard.c (menu_bar_items, tool_bar_items)
|
3348 |
|
|
(Fexecute_extended_command): Deal with `keymap' property.
|
3349 |
|
|
|
3350 |
|
|
When you install someone else's changes, put the contributor's name
|
3351 |
|
|
in the change log entry rather than in the text of the entry. In other
|
3352 |
|
|
words, write this:
|
3353 |
|
|
|
3354 |
|
|
2002-07-14 John Doe
|
3355 |
|
|
|
3356 |
|
|
* sewing.c: Make it sew.
|
3357 |
|
|
|
3358 |
|
|
rather than this:
|
3359 |
|
|
|
3360 |
|
|
2002-07-14 Usual Maintainer
|
3361 |
|
|
|
3362 |
|
|
* sewing.c: Make it sew. Patch by jdoe@gnu.org.
|
3363 |
|
|
|
3364 |
|
|
As for the date, that should be the date you applied the change.
|
3365 |
|
|
|
3366 |
|
|
|
3367 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Simple Changes, Next: Conditional Changes, Prev: Style of Change Logs, Up: Change Logs
|
3368 |
|
|
|
3369 |
|
|
6.8.3 Simple Changes
|
3370 |
|
|
--------------------
|
3371 |
|
|
|
3372 |
|
|
Certain simple kinds of changes don't need much detail in the change
|
3373 |
|
|
log.
|
3374 |
|
|
|
3375 |
|
|
When you change the calling sequence of a function in a simple
|
3376 |
|
|
fashion, and you change all the callers of the function to use the new
|
3377 |
|
|
calling sequence, there is no need to make individual entries for all
|
3378 |
|
|
the callers that you changed. Just write in the entry for the function
|
3379 |
|
|
being called, "All callers changed"--like this:
|
3380 |
|
|
|
3381 |
|
|
* keyboard.c (Fcommand_execute): New arg SPECIAL.
|
3382 |
|
|
All callers changed.
|
3383 |
|
|
|
3384 |
|
|
When you change just comments or doc strings, it is enough to write
|
3385 |
|
|
an entry for the file, without mentioning the functions. Just "Doc
|
3386 |
|
|
fixes" is enough for the change log.
|
3387 |
|
|
|
3388 |
|
|
There's no technical need to make change log entries for
|
3389 |
|
|
documentation files. This is because documentation is not susceptible
|
3390 |
|
|
to bugs that are hard to fix. Documentation does not consist of parts
|
3391 |
|
|
that must interact in a precisely engineered fashion. To correct an
|
3392 |
|
|
error, you need not know the history of the erroneous passage; it is
|
3393 |
|
|
enough to compare what the documentation says with the way the program
|
3394 |
|
|
actually works.
|
3395 |
|
|
|
3396 |
|
|
However, you should keep change logs for documentation files when the
|
3397 |
|
|
project gets copyright assignments from its contributors, so as to make
|
3398 |
|
|
the records of authorship more accurate.
|
3399 |
|
|
|
3400 |
|
|
|
3401 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Conditional Changes, Next: Indicating the Part Changed, Prev: Simple Changes, Up: Change Logs
|
3402 |
|
|
|
3403 |
|
|
6.8.4 Conditional Changes
|
3404 |
|
|
-------------------------
|
3405 |
|
|
|
3406 |
|
|
C programs often contain compile-time `#if' conditionals. Many changes
|
3407 |
|
|
are conditional; sometimes you add a new definition which is entirely
|
3408 |
|
|
contained in a conditional. It is very useful to indicate in the
|
3409 |
|
|
change log the conditions for which the change applies.
|
3410 |
|
|
|
3411 |
|
|
Our convention for indicating conditional changes is to use square
|
3412 |
|
|
brackets around the name of the condition.
|
3413 |
|
|
|
3414 |
|
|
Here is a simple example, describing a change which is conditional
|
3415 |
|
|
but does not have a function or entity name associated with it:
|
3416 |
|
|
|
3417 |
|
|
* xterm.c [SOLARIS2]: Include string.h.
|
3418 |
|
|
|
3419 |
|
|
Here is an entry describing a new definition which is entirely
|
3420 |
|
|
conditional. This new definition for the macro `FRAME_WINDOW_P' is
|
3421 |
|
|
used only when `HAVE_X_WINDOWS' is defined:
|
3422 |
|
|
|
3423 |
|
|
* frame.h [HAVE_X_WINDOWS] (FRAME_WINDOW_P): Macro defined.
|
3424 |
|
|
|
3425 |
|
|
Here is an entry for a change within the function `init_display',
|
3426 |
|
|
whose definition as a whole is unconditional, but the changes themselves
|
3427 |
|
|
are contained in a `#ifdef HAVE_LIBNCURSES' conditional:
|
3428 |
|
|
|
3429 |
|
|
* dispnew.c (init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
|
3430 |
|
|
|
3431 |
|
|
Here is an entry for a change that takes affect only when a certain
|
3432 |
|
|
macro is _not_ defined:
|
3433 |
|
|
|
3434 |
|
|
(gethostname) [!HAVE_SOCKETS]: Replace with winsock version.
|
3435 |
|
|
|
3436 |
|
|
|
3437 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Indicating the Part Changed, Prev: Conditional Changes, Up: Change Logs
|
3438 |
|
|
|
3439 |
|
|
6.8.5 Indicating the Part Changed
|
3440 |
|
|
---------------------------------
|
3441 |
|
|
|
3442 |
|
|
Indicate the part of a function which changed by using angle brackets
|
3443 |
|
|
enclosing an indication of what the changed part does. Here is an entry
|
3444 |
|
|
for a change in the part of the function `sh-while-getopts' that deals
|
3445 |
|
|
with `sh' commands:
|
3446 |
|
|
|
3447 |
|
|
* progmodes/sh-script.el (sh-while-getopts) : Handle case that
|
3448 |
|
|
user-specified option string is empty.
|
3449 |
|
|
|
3450 |
|
|
|
3451 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Man Pages, Next: Reading other Manuals, Prev: Change Logs, Up: Documentation
|
3452 |
|
|
|
3453 |
|
|
6.9 Man Pages
|
3454 |
|
|
=============
|
3455 |
|
|
|
3456 |
|
|
In the GNU project, man pages are secondary. It is not necessary or
|
3457 |
|
|
expected for every GNU program to have a man page, but some of them do.
|
3458 |
|
|
It's your choice whether to include a man page in your program.
|
3459 |
|
|
|
3460 |
|
|
When you make this decision, consider that supporting a man page
|
3461 |
|
|
requires continual effort each time the program is changed. The time
|
3462 |
|
|
you spend on the man page is time taken away from more useful work.
|
3463 |
|
|
|
3464 |
|
|
For a simple program which changes little, updating the man page may
|
3465 |
|
|
be a small job. Then there is little reason not to include a man page,
|
3466 |
|
|
if you have one.
|
3467 |
|
|
|
3468 |
|
|
For a large program that changes a great deal, updating a man page
|
3469 |
|
|
may be a substantial burden. If a user offers to donate a man page,
|
3470 |
|
|
you may find this gift costly to accept. It may be better to refuse
|
3471 |
|
|
the man page unless the same person agrees to take full responsibility
|
3472 |
|
|
for maintaining it--so that you can wash your hands of it entirely. If
|
3473 |
|
|
this volunteer later ceases to do the job, then don't feel obliged to
|
3474 |
|
|
pick it up yourself; it may be better to withdraw the man page from the
|
3475 |
|
|
distribution until someone else agrees to update it.
|
3476 |
|
|
|
3477 |
|
|
When a program changes only a little, you may feel that the
|
3478 |
|
|
discrepancies are small enough that the man page remains useful without
|
3479 |
|
|
updating. If so, put a prominent note near the beginning of the man
|
3480 |
|
|
page explaining that you don't maintain it and that the Texinfo manual
|
3481 |
|
|
is more authoritative. The note should say how to access the Texinfo
|
3482 |
|
|
documentation.
|
3483 |
|
|
|
3484 |
|
|
Be sure that man pages include a copyright statement and free
|
3485 |
|
|
license. The simple all-permissive license is appropriate for simple
|
3486 |
|
|
man pages:
|
3487 |
|
|
|
3488 |
|
|
Copying and distribution of this file, with or without modification,
|
3489 |
|
|
are permitted in any medium without royalty provided the copyright
|
3490 |
|
|
notice and this notice are preserved.
|
3491 |
|
|
|
3492 |
|
|
For long man pages, with enough explanation and documentation that
|
3493 |
|
|
they can be considered true manuals, use the GFDL (*note License for
|
3494 |
|
|
Manuals::).
|
3495 |
|
|
|
3496 |
|
|
Finally, the GNU help2man program
|
3497 |
|
|
(`http://www.gnu.org/software/help2man/') is one way to automate
|
3498 |
|
|
generation of a man page, in this case from `--help' output. This is
|
3499 |
|
|
sufficient in many cases.
|
3500 |
|
|
|
3501 |
|
|
|
3502 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Reading other Manuals, Prev: Man Pages, Up: Documentation
|
3503 |
|
|
|
3504 |
|
|
6.10 Reading other Manuals
|
3505 |
|
|
==========================
|
3506 |
|
|
|
3507 |
|
|
There may be non-free books or documentation files that describe the
|
3508 |
|
|
program you are documenting.
|
3509 |
|
|
|
3510 |
|
|
It is ok to use these documents for reference, just as the author of
|
3511 |
|
|
a new algebra textbook can read other books on algebra. A large portion
|
3512 |
|
|
of any non-fiction book consists of facts, in this case facts about how
|
3513 |
|
|
a certain program works, and these facts are necessarily the same for
|
3514 |
|
|
everyone who writes about the subject. But be careful not to copy your
|
3515 |
|
|
outline structure, wording, tables or examples from preexisting non-free
|
3516 |
|
|
documentation. Copying from free documentation may be ok; please check
|
3517 |
|
|
with the FSF about the individual case.
|
3518 |
|
|
|
3519 |
|
|
|
3520 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Managing Releases, Next: References, Prev: Documentation, Up: Top
|
3521 |
|
|
|
3522 |
|
|
7 The Release Process
|
3523 |
|
|
*********************
|
3524 |
|
|
|
3525 |
|
|
Making a release is more than just bundling up your source files in a
|
3526 |
|
|
tar file and putting it up for FTP. You should set up your software so
|
3527 |
|
|
that it can be configured to run on a variety of systems. Your Makefile
|
3528 |
|
|
should conform to the GNU standards described below, and your directory
|
3529 |
|
|
layout should also conform to the standards discussed below. Doing so
|
3530 |
|
|
makes it easy to include your package into the larger framework of all
|
3531 |
|
|
GNU software.
|
3532 |
|
|
|
3533 |
|
|
* Menu:
|
3534 |
|
|
|
3535 |
|
|
* Configuration:: How configuration of GNU packages should work.
|
3536 |
|
|
* Makefile Conventions:: Makefile conventions.
|
3537 |
|
|
* Releases:: Making releases
|
3538 |
|
|
|
3539 |
|
|
|
3540 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Configuration, Next: Makefile Conventions, Up: Managing Releases
|
3541 |
|
|
|
3542 |
|
|
7.1 How Configuration Should Work
|
3543 |
|
|
=================================
|
3544 |
|
|
|
3545 |
|
|
Each GNU distribution should come with a shell script named
|
3546 |
|
|
`configure'. This script is given arguments which describe the kind of
|
3547 |
|
|
machine and system you want to compile the program for.
|
3548 |
|
|
|
3549 |
|
|
The `configure' script must record the configuration options so that
|
3550 |
|
|
they affect compilation.
|
3551 |
|
|
|
3552 |
|
|
One way to do this is to make a link from a standard name such as
|
3553 |
|
|
`config.h' to the proper configuration file for the chosen system. If
|
3554 |
|
|
you use this technique, the distribution should _not_ contain a file
|
3555 |
|
|
named `config.h'. This is so that people won't be able to build the
|
3556 |
|
|
program without configuring it first.
|
3557 |
|
|
|
3558 |
|
|
Another thing that `configure' can do is to edit the Makefile. If
|
3559 |
|
|
you do this, the distribution should _not_ contain a file named
|
3560 |
|
|
`Makefile'. Instead, it should include a file `Makefile.in' which
|
3561 |
|
|
contains the input used for editing. Once again, this is so that people
|
3562 |
|
|
won't be able to build the program without configuring it first.
|
3563 |
|
|
|
3564 |
|
|
If `configure' does write the `Makefile', then `Makefile' should
|
3565 |
|
|
have a target named `Makefile' which causes `configure' to be rerun,
|
3566 |
|
|
setting up the same configuration that was set up last time. The files
|
3567 |
|
|
that `configure' reads should be listed as dependencies of `Makefile'.
|
3568 |
|
|
|
3569 |
|
|
All the files which are output from the `configure' script should
|
3570 |
|
|
have comments at the beginning explaining that they were generated
|
3571 |
|
|
automatically using `configure'. This is so that users won't think of
|
3572 |
|
|
trying to edit them by hand.
|
3573 |
|
|
|
3574 |
|
|
The `configure' script should write a file named `config.status'
|
3575 |
|
|
which describes which configuration options were specified when the
|
3576 |
|
|
program was last configured. This file should be a shell script which,
|
3577 |
|
|
if run, will recreate the same configuration.
|
3578 |
|
|
|
3579 |
|
|
The `configure' script should accept an option of the form
|
3580 |
|
|
`--srcdir=DIRNAME' to specify the directory where sources are found (if
|
3581 |
|
|
it is not the current directory). This makes it possible to build the
|
3582 |
|
|
program in a separate directory, so that the actual source directory is
|
3583 |
|
|
not modified.
|
3584 |
|
|
|
3585 |
|
|
If the user does not specify `--srcdir', then `configure' should
|
3586 |
|
|
check both `.' and `..' to see if it can find the sources. If it finds
|
3587 |
|
|
the sources in one of these places, it should use them from there.
|
3588 |
|
|
Otherwise, it should report that it cannot find the sources, and should
|
3589 |
|
|
exit with nonzero status.
|
3590 |
|
|
|
3591 |
|
|
Usually the easy way to support `--srcdir' is by editing a
|
3592 |
|
|
definition of `VPATH' into the Makefile. Some rules may need to refer
|
3593 |
|
|
explicitly to the specified source directory. To make this possible,
|
3594 |
|
|
`configure' can add to the Makefile a variable named `srcdir' whose
|
3595 |
|
|
value is precisely the specified directory.
|
3596 |
|
|
|
3597 |
|
|
The `configure' script should also take an argument which specifies
|
3598 |
|
|
the type of system to build the program for. This argument should look
|
3599 |
|
|
like this:
|
3600 |
|
|
|
3601 |
|
|
CPU-COMPANY-SYSTEM
|
3602 |
|
|
|
3603 |
|
|
For example, an Athlon-based GNU/Linux system might be
|
3604 |
|
|
`i686-pc-linux-gnu'.
|
3605 |
|
|
|
3606 |
|
|
The `configure' script needs to be able to decode all plausible
|
3607 |
|
|
alternatives for how to describe a machine. Thus,
|
3608 |
|
|
`athlon-pc-gnu/linux' would be a valid alias. There is a shell script
|
3609 |
|
|
called `config.sub'
|
3610 |
|
|
(http://savannah.gnu.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs/*checkout*/config/config/config.sub)
|
3611 |
|
|
that you can use as a subroutine to validate system types and
|
3612 |
|
|
canonicalize aliases.
|
3613 |
|
|
|
3614 |
|
|
The `configure' script should also take the option
|
3615 |
|
|
`--build=BUILDTYPE', which should be equivalent to a plain BUILDTYPE
|
3616 |
|
|
argument. For example, `configure --build=i686-pc-linux-gnu' is
|
3617 |
|
|
equivalent to `configure i686-pc-linux-gnu'. When the build type is
|
3618 |
|
|
not specified by an option or argument, the `configure' script should
|
3619 |
|
|
normally guess it using the shell script `config.guess'
|
3620 |
|
|
(http://savannah.gnu.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs/*checkout*/config/config/config.guess).
|
3621 |
|
|
|
3622 |
|
|
Other options are permitted to specify in more detail the software
|
3623 |
|
|
or hardware present on the machine, to include or exclude optional parts
|
3624 |
|
|
of the package, or to adjust the name of some tools or arguments to
|
3625 |
|
|
them:
|
3626 |
|
|
|
3627 |
|
|
`--enable-FEATURE[=PARAMETER]'
|
3628 |
|
|
Configure the package to build and install an optional user-level
|
3629 |
|
|
facility called FEATURE. This allows users to choose which
|
3630 |
|
|
optional features to include. Giving an optional PARAMETER of
|
3631 |
|
|
`no' should omit FEATURE, if it is built by default.
|
3632 |
|
|
|
3633 |
|
|
No `--enable' option should *ever* cause one feature to replace
|
3634 |
|
|
another. No `--enable' option should ever substitute one useful
|
3635 |
|
|
behavior for another useful behavior. The only proper use for
|
3636 |
|
|
`--enable' is for questions of whether to build part of the program
|
3637 |
|
|
or exclude it.
|
3638 |
|
|
|
3639 |
|
|
`--with-PACKAGE'
|
3640 |
|
|
The package PACKAGE will be installed, so configure this package
|
3641 |
|
|
to work with PACKAGE.
|
3642 |
|
|
|
3643 |
|
|
Possible values of PACKAGE include `gnu-as' (or `gas'), `gnu-ld',
|
3644 |
|
|
`gnu-libc', `gdb', `x', and `x-toolkit'.
|
3645 |
|
|
|
3646 |
|
|
Do not use a `--with' option to specify the file name to use to
|
3647 |
|
|
find certain files. That is outside the scope of what `--with'
|
3648 |
|
|
options are for.
|
3649 |
|
|
|
3650 |
|
|
`VARIABLE=VALUE'
|
3651 |
|
|
Set the value of the variable VARIABLE to VALUE. This is used to
|
3652 |
|
|
override the default values of commands or arguments in the build
|
3653 |
|
|
process. For example, the user could issue `configure CFLAGS=-g
|
3654 |
|
|
CXXFLAGS=-g' to build with debugging information and without the
|
3655 |
|
|
default optimization.
|
3656 |
|
|
|
3657 |
|
|
Specifying variables as arguments to `configure', like this:
|
3658 |
|
|
./configure CC=gcc
|
3659 |
|
|
is preferable to setting them in environment variables:
|
3660 |
|
|
CC=gcc ./configure
|
3661 |
|
|
as it helps to recreate the same configuration later with
|
3662 |
|
|
`config.status'.
|
3663 |
|
|
|
3664 |
|
|
All `configure' scripts should accept all of the "detail" options
|
3665 |
|
|
and the variable settings, whether or not they make any difference to
|
3666 |
|
|
the particular package at hand. In particular, they should accept any
|
3667 |
|
|
option that starts with `--with-' or `--enable-'. This is so users
|
3668 |
|
|
will be able to configure an entire GNU source tree at once with a
|
3669 |
|
|
single set of options.
|
3670 |
|
|
|
3671 |
|
|
You will note that the categories `--with-' and `--enable-' are
|
3672 |
|
|
narrow: they *do not* provide a place for any sort of option you might
|
3673 |
|
|
think of. That is deliberate. We want to limit the possible
|
3674 |
|
|
configuration options in GNU software. We do not want GNU programs to
|
3675 |
|
|
have idiosyncratic configuration options.
|
3676 |
|
|
|
3677 |
|
|
Packages that perform part of the compilation process may support
|
3678 |
|
|
cross-compilation. In such a case, the host and target machines for the
|
3679 |
|
|
program may be different.
|
3680 |
|
|
|
3681 |
|
|
The `configure' script should normally treat the specified type of
|
3682 |
|
|
system as both the host and the target, thus producing a program which
|
3683 |
|
|
works for the same type of machine that it runs on.
|
3684 |
|
|
|
3685 |
|
|
To compile a program to run on a host type that differs from the
|
3686 |
|
|
build type, use the configure option `--host=HOSTTYPE', where HOSTTYPE
|
3687 |
|
|
uses the same syntax as BUILDTYPE. The host type normally defaults to
|
3688 |
|
|
the build type.
|
3689 |
|
|
|
3690 |
|
|
To configure a cross-compiler, cross-assembler, or what have you, you
|
3691 |
|
|
should specify a target different from the host, using the configure
|
3692 |
|
|
option `--target=TARGETTYPE'. The syntax for TARGETTYPE is the same as
|
3693 |
|
|
for the host type. So the command would look like this:
|
3694 |
|
|
|
3695 |
|
|
./configure --host=HOSTTYPE --target=TARGETTYPE
|
3696 |
|
|
|
3697 |
|
|
The target type normally defaults to the host type. Programs for
|
3698 |
|
|
which cross-operation is not meaningful need not accept the `--target'
|
3699 |
|
|
option, because configuring an entire operating system for
|
3700 |
|
|
cross-operation is not a meaningful operation.
|
3701 |
|
|
|
3702 |
|
|
Some programs have ways of configuring themselves automatically. If
|
3703 |
|
|
your program is set up to do this, your `configure' script can simply
|
3704 |
|
|
ignore most of its arguments.
|
3705 |
|
|
|
3706 |
|
|
|
3707 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Makefile Conventions, Next: Releases, Prev: Configuration, Up: Managing Releases
|
3708 |
|
|
|
3709 |
|
|
7.2 Makefile Conventions
|
3710 |
|
|
========================
|
3711 |
|
|
|
3712 |
|
|
This node describes conventions for writing the Makefiles for GNU
|
3713 |
|
|
programs. Using Automake will help you write a Makefile that follows
|
3714 |
|
|
these conventions.
|
3715 |
|
|
|
3716 |
|
|
* Menu:
|
3717 |
|
|
|
3718 |
|
|
* Makefile Basics:: General conventions for Makefiles.
|
3719 |
|
|
* Utilities in Makefiles:: Utilities to be used in Makefiles.
|
3720 |
|
|
* Command Variables:: Variables for specifying commands.
|
3721 |
|
|
* DESTDIR:: Supporting staged installs.
|
3722 |
|
|
* Directory Variables:: Variables for installation directories.
|
3723 |
|
|
* Standard Targets:: Standard targets for users.
|
3724 |
|
|
* Install Command Categories:: Three categories of commands in the `install'
|
3725 |
|
|
rule: normal, pre-install and post-install.
|
3726 |
|
|
|
3727 |
|
|
|
3728 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Makefile Basics, Next: Utilities in Makefiles, Up: Makefile Conventions
|
3729 |
|
|
|
3730 |
|
|
7.2.1 General Conventions for Makefiles
|
3731 |
|
|
---------------------------------------
|
3732 |
|
|
|
3733 |
|
|
Every Makefile should contain this line:
|
3734 |
|
|
|
3735 |
|
|
SHELL = /bin/sh
|
3736 |
|
|
|
3737 |
|
|
to avoid trouble on systems where the `SHELL' variable might be
|
3738 |
|
|
inherited from the environment. (This is never a problem with GNU
|
3739 |
|
|
`make'.)
|
3740 |
|
|
|
3741 |
|
|
Different `make' programs have incompatible suffix lists and
|
3742 |
|
|
implicit rules, and this sometimes creates confusion or misbehavior. So
|
3743 |
|
|
it is a good idea to set the suffix list explicitly using only the
|
3744 |
|
|
suffixes you need in the particular Makefile, like this:
|
3745 |
|
|
|
3746 |
|
|
.SUFFIXES:
|
3747 |
|
|
.SUFFIXES: .c .o
|
3748 |
|
|
|
3749 |
|
|
The first line clears out the suffix list, the second introduces all
|
3750 |
|
|
suffixes which may be subject to implicit rules in this Makefile.
|
3751 |
|
|
|
3752 |
|
|
Don't assume that `.' is in the path for command execution. When
|
3753 |
|
|
you need to run programs that are a part of your package during the
|
3754 |
|
|
make, please make sure that it uses `./' if the program is built as
|
3755 |
|
|
part of the make or `$(srcdir)/' if the file is an unchanging part of
|
3756 |
|
|
the source code. Without one of these prefixes, the current search
|
3757 |
|
|
path is used.
|
3758 |
|
|
|
3759 |
|
|
The distinction between `./' (the "build directory") and
|
3760 |
|
|
`$(srcdir)/' (the "source directory") is important because users can
|
3761 |
|
|
build in a separate directory using the `--srcdir' option to
|
3762 |
|
|
`configure'. A rule of the form:
|
3763 |
|
|
|
3764 |
|
|
foo.1 : foo.man sedscript
|
3765 |
|
|
sed -e sedscript foo.man > foo.1
|
3766 |
|
|
|
3767 |
|
|
will fail when the build directory is not the source directory, because
|
3768 |
|
|
`foo.man' and `sedscript' are in the source directory.
|
3769 |
|
|
|
3770 |
|
|
When using GNU `make', relying on `VPATH' to find the source file
|
3771 |
|
|
will work in the case where there is a single dependency file, since
|
3772 |
|
|
the `make' automatic variable `$<' will represent the source file
|
3773 |
|
|
wherever it is. (Many versions of `make' set `$<' only in implicit
|
3774 |
|
|
rules.) A Makefile target like
|
3775 |
|
|
|
3776 |
|
|
foo.o : bar.c
|
3777 |
|
|
$(CC) -I. -I$(srcdir) $(CFLAGS) -c bar.c -o foo.o
|
3778 |
|
|
|
3779 |
|
|
should instead be written as
|
3780 |
|
|
|
3781 |
|
|
foo.o : bar.c
|
3782 |
|
|
$(CC) -I. -I$(srcdir) $(CFLAGS) -c $< -o $@
|
3783 |
|
|
|
3784 |
|
|
in order to allow `VPATH' to work correctly. When the target has
|
3785 |
|
|
multiple dependencies, using an explicit `$(srcdir)' is the easiest way
|
3786 |
|
|
to make the rule work well. For example, the target above for `foo.1'
|
3787 |
|
|
is best written as:
|
3788 |
|
|
|
3789 |
|
|
foo.1 : foo.man sedscript
|
3790 |
|
|
sed -e $(srcdir)/sedscript $(srcdir)/foo.man > $@
|
3791 |
|
|
|
3792 |
|
|
GNU distributions usually contain some files which are not source
|
3793 |
|
|
files--for example, Info files, and the output from Autoconf, Automake,
|
3794 |
|
|
Bison or Flex. Since these files normally appear in the source
|
3795 |
|
|
directory, they should always appear in the source directory, not in the
|
3796 |
|
|
build directory. So Makefile rules to update them should put the
|
3797 |
|
|
updated files in the source directory.
|
3798 |
|
|
|
3799 |
|
|
However, if a file does not appear in the distribution, then the
|
3800 |
|
|
Makefile should not put it in the source directory, because building a
|
3801 |
|
|
program in ordinary circumstances should not modify the source directory
|
3802 |
|
|
in any way.
|
3803 |
|
|
|
3804 |
|
|
Try to make the build and installation targets, at least (and all
|
3805 |
|
|
their subtargets) work correctly with a parallel `make'.
|
3806 |
|
|
|
3807 |
|
|
|
3808 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Utilities in Makefiles, Next: Command Variables, Prev: Makefile Basics, Up: Makefile Conventions
|
3809 |
|
|
|
3810 |
|
|
7.2.2 Utilities in Makefiles
|
3811 |
|
|
----------------------------
|
3812 |
|
|
|
3813 |
|
|
Write the Makefile commands (and any shell scripts, such as
|
3814 |
|
|
`configure') to run in `sh', not in `csh'. Don't use any special
|
3815 |
|
|
features of `ksh' or `bash'.
|
3816 |
|
|
|
3817 |
|
|
The `configure' script and the Makefile rules for building and
|
3818 |
|
|
installation should not use any utilities directly except these:
|
3819 |
|
|
|
3820 |
|
|
cat cmp cp diff echo egrep expr false grep install-info
|
3821 |
|
|
ln ls mkdir mv pwd rm rmdir sed sleep sort tar test touch true
|
3822 |
|
|
|
3823 |
|
|
The compression program `gzip' can be used in the `dist' rule.
|
3824 |
|
|
|
3825 |
|
|
Stick to the generally supported options for these programs. For
|
3826 |
|
|
example, don't use `mkdir -p', convenient as it may be, because most
|
3827 |
|
|
systems don't support it.
|
3828 |
|
|
|
3829 |
|
|
It is a good idea to avoid creating symbolic links in makefiles,
|
3830 |
|
|
since a few systems don't support them.
|
3831 |
|
|
|
3832 |
|
|
The Makefile rules for building and installation can also use
|
3833 |
|
|
compilers and related programs, but should do so via `make' variables
|
3834 |
|
|
so that the user can substitute alternatives. Here are some of the
|
3835 |
|
|
programs we mean:
|
3836 |
|
|
|
3837 |
|
|
ar bison cc flex install ld ldconfig lex
|
3838 |
|
|
make makeinfo ranlib texi2dvi yacc
|
3839 |
|
|
|
3840 |
|
|
Use the following `make' variables to run those programs:
|
3841 |
|
|
|
3842 |
|
|
$(AR) $(BISON) $(CC) $(FLEX) $(INSTALL) $(LD) $(LDCONFIG) $(LEX)
|
3843 |
|
|
$(MAKE) $(MAKEINFO) $(RANLIB) $(TEXI2DVI) $(YACC)
|
3844 |
|
|
|
3845 |
|
|
When you use `ranlib' or `ldconfig', you should make sure nothing
|
3846 |
|
|
bad happens if the system does not have the program in question.
|
3847 |
|
|
Arrange to ignore an error from that command, and print a message before
|
3848 |
|
|
the command to tell the user that failure of this command does not mean
|
3849 |
|
|
a problem. (The Autoconf `AC_PROG_RANLIB' macro can help with this.)
|
3850 |
|
|
|
3851 |
|
|
If you use symbolic links, you should implement a fallback for
|
3852 |
|
|
systems that don't have symbolic links.
|
3853 |
|
|
|
3854 |
|
|
Additional utilities that can be used via Make variables are:
|
3855 |
|
|
|
3856 |
|
|
chgrp chmod chown mknod
|
3857 |
|
|
|
3858 |
|
|
It is ok to use other utilities in Makefile portions (or scripts)
|
3859 |
|
|
intended only for particular systems where you know those utilities
|
3860 |
|
|
exist.
|
3861 |
|
|
|
3862 |
|
|
|
3863 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Command Variables, Next: DESTDIR, Prev: Utilities in Makefiles, Up: Makefile Conventions
|
3864 |
|
|
|
3865 |
|
|
7.2.3 Variables for Specifying Commands
|
3866 |
|
|
---------------------------------------
|
3867 |
|
|
|
3868 |
|
|
Makefiles should provide variables for overriding certain commands,
|
3869 |
|
|
options, and so on.
|
3870 |
|
|
|
3871 |
|
|
In particular, you should run most utility programs via variables.
|
3872 |
|
|
Thus, if you use Bison, have a variable named `BISON' whose default
|
3873 |
|
|
value is set with `BISON = bison', and refer to it with `$(BISON)'
|
3874 |
|
|
whenever you need to use Bison.
|
3875 |
|
|
|
3876 |
|
|
File management utilities such as `ln', `rm', `mv', and so on, need
|
3877 |
|
|
not be referred to through variables in this way, since users don't
|
3878 |
|
|
need to replace them with other programs.
|
3879 |
|
|
|
3880 |
|
|
Each program-name variable should come with an options variable that
|
3881 |
|
|
is used to supply options to the program. Append `FLAGS' to the
|
3882 |
|
|
program-name variable name to get the options variable name--for
|
3883 |
|
|
example, `BISONFLAGS'. (The names `CFLAGS' for the C compiler,
|
3884 |
|
|
`YFLAGS' for yacc, and `LFLAGS' for lex, are exceptions to this rule,
|
3885 |
|
|
but we keep them because they are standard.) Use `CPPFLAGS' in any
|
3886 |
|
|
compilation command that runs the preprocessor, and use `LDFLAGS' in
|
3887 |
|
|
any compilation command that does linking as well as in any direct use
|
3888 |
|
|
of `ld'.
|
3889 |
|
|
|
3890 |
|
|
If there are C compiler options that _must_ be used for proper
|
3891 |
|
|
compilation of certain files, do not include them in `CFLAGS'. Users
|
3892 |
|
|
expect to be able to specify `CFLAGS' freely themselves. Instead,
|
3893 |
|
|
arrange to pass the necessary options to the C compiler independently
|
3894 |
|
|
of `CFLAGS', by writing them explicitly in the compilation commands or
|
3895 |
|
|
by defining an implicit rule, like this:
|
3896 |
|
|
|
3897 |
|
|
CFLAGS = -g
|
3898 |
|
|
ALL_CFLAGS = -I. $(CFLAGS)
|
3899 |
|
|
.c.o:
|
3900 |
|
|
$(CC) -c $(CPPFLAGS) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $<
|
3901 |
|
|
|
3902 |
|
|
Do include the `-g' option in `CFLAGS', because that is not
|
3903 |
|
|
_required_ for proper compilation. You can consider it a default that
|
3904 |
|
|
is only recommended. If the package is set up so that it is compiled
|
3905 |
|
|
with GCC by default, then you might as well include `-O' in the default
|
3906 |
|
|
value of `CFLAGS' as well.
|
3907 |
|
|
|
3908 |
|
|
Put `CFLAGS' last in the compilation command, after other variables
|
3909 |
|
|
containing compiler options, so the user can use `CFLAGS' to override
|
3910 |
|
|
the others.
|
3911 |
|
|
|
3912 |
|
|
`CFLAGS' should be used in every invocation of the C compiler, both
|
3913 |
|
|
those which do compilation and those which do linking.
|
3914 |
|
|
|
3915 |
|
|
Every Makefile should define the variable `INSTALL', which is the
|
3916 |
|
|
basic command for installing a file into the system.
|
3917 |
|
|
|
3918 |
|
|
Every Makefile should also define the variables `INSTALL_PROGRAM'
|
3919 |
|
|
and `INSTALL_DATA'. (The default for `INSTALL_PROGRAM' should be
|
3920 |
|
|
`$(INSTALL)'; the default for `INSTALL_DATA' should be `${INSTALL} -m
|
3921 |
|
|
644'.) Then it should use those variables as the commands for actual
|
3922 |
|
|
installation, for executables and non-executables respectively.
|
3923 |
|
|
Minimal use of these variables is as follows:
|
3924 |
|
|
|
3925 |
|
|
$(INSTALL_PROGRAM) foo $(bindir)/foo
|
3926 |
|
|
$(INSTALL_DATA) libfoo.a $(libdir)/libfoo.a
|
3927 |
|
|
|
3928 |
|
|
However, it is preferable to support a `DESTDIR' prefix on the
|
3929 |
|
|
target files, as explained in the next section.
|
3930 |
|
|
|
3931 |
|
|
Always use a file name, not a directory name, as the second argument of
|
3932 |
|
|
the installation commands. Use a separate command for each file to be
|
3933 |
|
|
installed.
|
3934 |
|
|
|
3935 |
|
|
|
3936 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: DESTDIR, Next: Directory Variables, Prev: Command Variables, Up: Makefile Conventions
|
3937 |
|
|
|
3938 |
|
|
7.2.4 `DESTDIR': support for staged installs
|
3939 |
|
|
--------------------------------------------
|
3940 |
|
|
|
3941 |
|
|
`DESTDIR' is a variable prepended to each installed target file, like
|
3942 |
|
|
this:
|
3943 |
|
|
|
3944 |
|
|
$(INSTALL_PROGRAM) foo $(DESTDIR)$(bindir)/foo
|
3945 |
|
|
$(INSTALL_DATA) libfoo.a $(DESTDIR)$(libdir)/libfoo.a
|
3946 |
|
|
|
3947 |
|
|
The `DESTDIR' variable is specified by the user on the `make'
|
3948 |
|
|
command line. For example:
|
3949 |
|
|
|
3950 |
|
|
make DESTDIR=/tmp/stage install
|
3951 |
|
|
|
3952 |
|
|
`DESTDIR' should be supported only in the `install*' and `uninstall*'
|
3953 |
|
|
targets, as those are the only targets where it is useful.
|
3954 |
|
|
|
3955 |
|
|
If your installation step would normally install
|
3956 |
|
|
`/usr/local/bin/foo' and `/usr/local/lib/libfoo.a', then an
|
3957 |
|
|
installation invoked as in the example above would install
|
3958 |
|
|
`/tmp/stage/usr/local/bin/foo' and `/tmp/stage/usr/local/lib/libfoo.a'
|
3959 |
|
|
instead.
|
3960 |
|
|
|
3961 |
|
|
Prepending the variable `DESTDIR' to each target in this way
|
3962 |
|
|
provides for "staged installs", where the installed files are not
|
3963 |
|
|
placed directly into their expected location but are instead copied
|
3964 |
|
|
into a temporary location (`DESTDIR'). However, installed files
|
3965 |
|
|
maintain their relative directory structure and any embedded file names
|
3966 |
|
|
will not be modified.
|
3967 |
|
|
|
3968 |
|
|
You should not set the value of `DESTDIR' in your `Makefile' at all;
|
3969 |
|
|
then the files are installed into their expected locations by default.
|
3970 |
|
|
Also, specifying `DESTDIR' should not change the operation of the
|
3971 |
|
|
software in any way, so its value should not be included in any file
|
3972 |
|
|
contents.
|
3973 |
|
|
|
3974 |
|
|
`DESTDIR' support is commonly used in package creation. It is also
|
3975 |
|
|
helpful to users who want to understand what a given package will
|
3976 |
|
|
install where, and to allow users who don't normally have permissions
|
3977 |
|
|
to install into protected areas to build and install before gaining
|
3978 |
|
|
those permissions. Finally, it can be useful with tools such as
|
3979 |
|
|
`stow', where code is installed in one place but made to appear to be
|
3980 |
|
|
installed somewhere else using symbolic links or special mount
|
3981 |
|
|
operations. So, we strongly recommend GNU packages support `DESTDIR',
|
3982 |
|
|
though it is not an absolute requirement.
|
3983 |
|
|
|
3984 |
|
|
|
3985 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Directory Variables, Next: Standard Targets, Prev: DESTDIR, Up: Makefile Conventions
|
3986 |
|
|
|
3987 |
|
|
7.2.5 Variables for Installation Directories
|
3988 |
|
|
--------------------------------------------
|
3989 |
|
|
|
3990 |
|
|
Installation directories should always be named by variables, so it is
|
3991 |
|
|
easy to install in a nonstandard place. The standard names for these
|
3992 |
|
|
variables and the values they should have in GNU packages are described
|
3993 |
|
|
below. They are based on a standard file system layout; variants of it
|
3994 |
|
|
are used in GNU/Linux and other modern operating systems.
|
3995 |
|
|
|
3996 |
|
|
Installers are expected to override these values when calling `make'
|
3997 |
|
|
(e.g., `make prefix=/usr install' or `configure' (e.g., `configure
|
3998 |
|
|
--prefix=/usr'). GNU packages should not try to guess which value
|
3999 |
|
|
should be appropriate for these variables on the system they are being
|
4000 |
|
|
installed onto: use the default settings specified here so that all GNU
|
4001 |
|
|
packages behave identically, allowing the installer to achieve any
|
4002 |
|
|
desired layout.
|
4003 |
|
|
|
4004 |
|
|
These first two variables set the root for the installation. All the
|
4005 |
|
|
other installation directories should be subdirectories of one of these
|
4006 |
|
|
two, and nothing should be directly installed into these two
|
4007 |
|
|
directories.
|
4008 |
|
|
|
4009 |
|
|
`prefix'
|
4010 |
|
|
A prefix used in constructing the default values of the variables
|
4011 |
|
|
listed below. The default value of `prefix' should be
|
4012 |
|
|
`/usr/local'. When building the complete GNU system, the prefix
|
4013 |
|
|
will be empty and `/usr' will be a symbolic link to `/'. (If you
|
4014 |
|
|
are using Autoconf, write it as `@prefix@'.)
|
4015 |
|
|
|
4016 |
|
|
Running `make install' with a different value of `prefix' from the
|
4017 |
|
|
one used to build the program should _not_ recompile the program.
|
4018 |
|
|
|
4019 |
|
|
`exec_prefix'
|
4020 |
|
|
A prefix used in constructing the default values of some of the
|
4021 |
|
|
variables listed below. The default value of `exec_prefix' should
|
4022 |
|
|
be `$(prefix)'. (If you are using Autoconf, write it as
|
4023 |
|
|
`@exec_prefix@'.)
|
4024 |
|
|
|
4025 |
|
|
Generally, `$(exec_prefix)' is used for directories that contain
|
4026 |
|
|
machine-specific files (such as executables and subroutine
|
4027 |
|
|
libraries), while `$(prefix)' is used directly for other
|
4028 |
|
|
directories.
|
4029 |
|
|
|
4030 |
|
|
Running `make install' with a different value of `exec_prefix'
|
4031 |
|
|
from the one used to build the program should _not_ recompile the
|
4032 |
|
|
program.
|
4033 |
|
|
|
4034 |
|
|
Executable programs are installed in one of the following
|
4035 |
|
|
directories.
|
4036 |
|
|
|
4037 |
|
|
`bindir'
|
4038 |
|
|
The directory for installing executable programs that users can
|
4039 |
|
|
run. This should normally be `/usr/local/bin', but write it as
|
4040 |
|
|
`$(exec_prefix)/bin'. (If you are using Autoconf, write it as
|
4041 |
|
|
`@bindir@'.)
|
4042 |
|
|
|
4043 |
|
|
`sbindir'
|
4044 |
|
|
The directory for installing executable programs that can be run
|
4045 |
|
|
from the shell, but are only generally useful to system
|
4046 |
|
|
administrators. This should normally be `/usr/local/sbin', but
|
4047 |
|
|
write it as `$(exec_prefix)/sbin'. (If you are using Autoconf,
|
4048 |
|
|
write it as `@sbindir@'.)
|
4049 |
|
|
|
4050 |
|
|
`libexecdir'
|
4051 |
|
|
The directory for installing executable programs to be run by other
|
4052 |
|
|
programs rather than by users. This directory should normally be
|
4053 |
|
|
`/usr/local/libexec', but write it as `$(exec_prefix)/libexec'.
|
4054 |
|
|
(If you are using Autoconf, write it as `@libexecdir@'.)
|
4055 |
|
|
|
4056 |
|
|
The definition of `libexecdir' is the same for all packages, so
|
4057 |
|
|
you should install your data in a subdirectory thereof. Most
|
4058 |
|
|
packages install their data under `$(libexecdir)/PACKAGE-NAME/',
|
4059 |
|
|
possibly within additional subdirectories thereof, such as
|
4060 |
|
|
`$(libexecdir)/PACKAGE-NAME/MACHINE/VERSION'.
|
4061 |
|
|
|
4062 |
|
|
Data files used by the program during its execution are divided into
|
4063 |
|
|
categories in two ways.
|
4064 |
|
|
|
4065 |
|
|
* Some files are normally modified by programs; others are never
|
4066 |
|
|
normally modified (though users may edit some of these).
|
4067 |
|
|
|
4068 |
|
|
* Some files are architecture-independent and can be shared by all
|
4069 |
|
|
machines at a site; some are architecture-dependent and can be
|
4070 |
|
|
shared only by machines of the same kind and operating system;
|
4071 |
|
|
others may never be shared between two machines.
|
4072 |
|
|
|
4073 |
|
|
This makes for six different possibilities. However, we want to
|
4074 |
|
|
discourage the use of architecture-dependent files, aside from object
|
4075 |
|
|
files and libraries. It is much cleaner to make other data files
|
4076 |
|
|
architecture-independent, and it is generally not hard.
|
4077 |
|
|
|
4078 |
|
|
Here are the variables Makefiles should use to specify directories
|
4079 |
|
|
to put these various kinds of files in:
|
4080 |
|
|
|
4081 |
|
|
`datarootdir'
|
4082 |
|
|
The root of the directory tree for read-only
|
4083 |
|
|
architecture-independent data files. This should normally be
|
4084 |
|
|
`/usr/local/share', but write it as `$(prefix)/share'. (If you
|
4085 |
|
|
are using Autoconf, write it as `@datarootdir@'.) `datadir''s
|
4086 |
|
|
default value is based on this variable; so are `infodir',
|
4087 |
|
|
`mandir', and others.
|
4088 |
|
|
|
4089 |
|
|
`datadir'
|
4090 |
|
|
The directory for installing idiosyncratic read-only
|
4091 |
|
|
architecture-independent data files for this program. This is
|
4092 |
|
|
usually the same place as `datarootdir', but we use the two
|
4093 |
|
|
separate variables so that you can move these program-specific
|
4094 |
|
|
files without altering the location for Info files, man pages, etc.
|
4095 |
|
|
|
4096 |
|
|
This should normally be `/usr/local/share', but write it as
|
4097 |
|
|
`$(datarootdir)'. (If you are using Autoconf, write it as
|
4098 |
|
|
`@datadir@'.)
|
4099 |
|
|
|
4100 |
|
|
The definition of `datadir' is the same for all packages, so you
|
4101 |
|
|
should install your data in a subdirectory thereof. Most packages
|
4102 |
|
|
install their data under `$(datadir)/PACKAGE-NAME/'.
|
4103 |
|
|
|
4104 |
|
|
`sysconfdir'
|
4105 |
|
|
The directory for installing read-only data files that pertain to a
|
4106 |
|
|
single machine-that is to say, files for configuring a host.
|
4107 |
|
|
Mailer and network configuration files, `/etc/passwd', and so
|
4108 |
|
|
forth belong here. All the files in this directory should be
|
4109 |
|
|
ordinary ASCII text files. This directory should normally be
|
4110 |
|
|
`/usr/local/etc', but write it as `$(prefix)/etc'. (If you are
|
4111 |
|
|
using Autoconf, write it as `@sysconfdir@'.)
|
4112 |
|
|
|
4113 |
|
|
Do not install executables here in this directory (they probably
|
4114 |
|
|
belong in `$(libexecdir)' or `$(sbindir)'). Also do not install
|
4115 |
|
|
files that are modified in the normal course of their use (programs
|
4116 |
|
|
whose purpose is to change the configuration of the system
|
4117 |
|
|
excluded). Those probably belong in `$(localstatedir)'.
|
4118 |
|
|
|
4119 |
|
|
`sharedstatedir'
|
4120 |
|
|
The directory for installing architecture-independent data files
|
4121 |
|
|
which the programs modify while they run. This should normally be
|
4122 |
|
|
`/usr/local/com', but write it as `$(prefix)/com'. (If you are
|
4123 |
|
|
using Autoconf, write it as `@sharedstatedir@'.)
|
4124 |
|
|
|
4125 |
|
|
`localstatedir'
|
4126 |
|
|
The directory for installing data files which the programs modify
|
4127 |
|
|
while they run, and that pertain to one specific machine. Users
|
4128 |
|
|
should never need to modify files in this directory to configure
|
4129 |
|
|
the package's operation; put such configuration information in
|
4130 |
|
|
separate files that go in `$(datadir)' or `$(sysconfdir)'.
|
4131 |
|
|
`$(localstatedir)' should normally be `/usr/local/var', but write
|
4132 |
|
|
it as `$(prefix)/var'. (If you are using Autoconf, write it as
|
4133 |
|
|
`@localstatedir@'.)
|
4134 |
|
|
|
4135 |
|
|
These variables specify the directory for installing certain specific
|
4136 |
|
|
types of files, if your program has them. Every GNU package should
|
4137 |
|
|
have Info files, so every program needs `infodir', but not all need
|
4138 |
|
|
`libdir' or `lispdir'.
|
4139 |
|
|
|
4140 |
|
|
`includedir'
|
4141 |
|
|
The directory for installing header files to be included by user
|
4142 |
|
|
programs with the C `#include' preprocessor directive. This
|
4143 |
|
|
should normally be `/usr/local/include', but write it as
|
4144 |
|
|
`$(prefix)/include'. (If you are using Autoconf, write it as
|
4145 |
|
|
`@includedir@'.)
|
4146 |
|
|
|
4147 |
|
|
Most compilers other than GCC do not look for header files in
|
4148 |
|
|
directory `/usr/local/include'. So installing the header files
|
4149 |
|
|
this way is only useful with GCC. Sometimes this is not a problem
|
4150 |
|
|
because some libraries are only really intended to work with GCC.
|
4151 |
|
|
But some libraries are intended to work with other compilers.
|
4152 |
|
|
They should install their header files in two places, one
|
4153 |
|
|
specified by `includedir' and one specified by `oldincludedir'.
|
4154 |
|
|
|
4155 |
|
|
`oldincludedir'
|
4156 |
|
|
The directory for installing `#include' header files for use with
|
4157 |
|
|
compilers other than GCC. This should normally be `/usr/include'.
|
4158 |
|
|
(If you are using Autoconf, you can write it as `@oldincludedir@'.)
|
4159 |
|
|
|
4160 |
|
|
The Makefile commands should check whether the value of
|
4161 |
|
|
`oldincludedir' is empty. If it is, they should not try to use
|
4162 |
|
|
it; they should cancel the second installation of the header files.
|
4163 |
|
|
|
4164 |
|
|
A package should not replace an existing header in this directory
|
4165 |
|
|
unless the header came from the same package. Thus, if your Foo
|
4166 |
|
|
package provides a header file `foo.h', then it should install the
|
4167 |
|
|
header file in the `oldincludedir' directory if either (1) there
|
4168 |
|
|
is no `foo.h' there or (2) the `foo.h' that exists came from the
|
4169 |
|
|
Foo package.
|
4170 |
|
|
|
4171 |
|
|
To tell whether `foo.h' came from the Foo package, put a magic
|
4172 |
|
|
string in the file--part of a comment--and `grep' for that string.
|
4173 |
|
|
|
4174 |
|
|
`docdir'
|
4175 |
|
|
The directory for installing documentation files (other than Info)
|
4176 |
|
|
for this package. By default, it should be
|
4177 |
|
|
`/usr/local/share/doc/YOURPKG', but it should be written as
|
4178 |
|
|
`$(datarootdir)/doc/YOURPKG'. (If you are using Autoconf, write
|
4179 |
|
|
it as `@docdir@'.) The YOURPKG subdirectory, which may include a
|
4180 |
|
|
version number, prevents collisions among files with common names,
|
4181 |
|
|
such as `README'.
|
4182 |
|
|
|
4183 |
|
|
`infodir'
|
4184 |
|
|
The directory for installing the Info files for this package. By
|
4185 |
|
|
default, it should be `/usr/local/share/info', but it should be
|
4186 |
|
|
written as `$(datarootdir)/info'. (If you are using Autoconf,
|
4187 |
|
|
write it as `@infodir@'.) `infodir' is separate from `docdir' for
|
4188 |
|
|
compatibility with existing practice.
|
4189 |
|
|
|
4190 |
|
|
`htmldir'
|
4191 |
|
|
`dvidir'
|
4192 |
|
|
`pdfdir'
|
4193 |
|
|
`psdir'
|
4194 |
|
|
Directories for installing documentation files in the particular
|
4195 |
|
|
format. They should all be set to `$(docdir)' by default. (If
|
4196 |
|
|
you are using Autoconf, write them as `@htmldir@', `@dvidir@',
|
4197 |
|
|
etc.) Packages which supply several translations of their
|
4198 |
|
|
documentation should install them in `$(htmldir)/'LL,
|
4199 |
|
|
`$(pdfdir)/'LL, etc. where LL is a locale abbreviation such as
|
4200 |
|
|
`en' or `pt_BR'.
|
4201 |
|
|
|
4202 |
|
|
`libdir'
|
4203 |
|
|
The directory for object files and libraries of object code. Do
|
4204 |
|
|
not install executables here, they probably ought to go in
|
4205 |
|
|
`$(libexecdir)' instead. The value of `libdir' should normally be
|
4206 |
|
|
`/usr/local/lib', but write it as `$(exec_prefix)/lib'. (If you
|
4207 |
|
|
are using Autoconf, write it as `@libdir@'.)
|
4208 |
|
|
|
4209 |
|
|
`lispdir'
|
4210 |
|
|
The directory for installing any Emacs Lisp files in this package.
|
4211 |
|
|
By default, it should be `/usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp', but
|
4212 |
|
|
it should be written as `$(datarootdir)/emacs/site-lisp'.
|
4213 |
|
|
|
4214 |
|
|
If you are using Autoconf, write the default as `@lispdir@'. In
|
4215 |
|
|
order to make `@lispdir@' work, you need the following lines in
|
4216 |
|
|
your `configure.in' file:
|
4217 |
|
|
|
4218 |
|
|
lispdir='${datarootdir}/emacs/site-lisp'
|
4219 |
|
|
AC_SUBST(lispdir)
|
4220 |
|
|
|
4221 |
|
|
`localedir'
|
4222 |
|
|
The directory for installing locale-specific message catalogs for
|
4223 |
|
|
this package. By default, it should be `/usr/local/share/locale',
|
4224 |
|
|
but it should be written as `$(datarootdir)/locale'. (If you are
|
4225 |
|
|
using Autoconf, write it as `@localedir@'.) This directory
|
4226 |
|
|
usually has a subdirectory per locale.
|
4227 |
|
|
|
4228 |
|
|
Unix-style man pages are installed in one of the following:
|
4229 |
|
|
|
4230 |
|
|
`mandir'
|
4231 |
|
|
The top-level directory for installing the man pages (if any) for
|
4232 |
|
|
this package. It will normally be `/usr/local/share/man', but you
|
4233 |
|
|
should write it as `$(datarootdir)/man'. (If you are using
|
4234 |
|
|
Autoconf, write it as `@mandir@'.)
|
4235 |
|
|
|
4236 |
|
|
`man1dir'
|
4237 |
|
|
The directory for installing section 1 man pages. Write it as
|
4238 |
|
|
`$(mandir)/man1'.
|
4239 |
|
|
|
4240 |
|
|
`man2dir'
|
4241 |
|
|
The directory for installing section 2 man pages. Write it as
|
4242 |
|
|
`$(mandir)/man2'
|
4243 |
|
|
|
4244 |
|
|
`...'
|
4245 |
|
|
*Don't make the primary documentation for any GNU software be a
|
4246 |
|
|
man page. Write a manual in Texinfo instead. Man pages are just
|
4247 |
|
|
for the sake of people running GNU software on Unix, which is a
|
4248 |
|
|
secondary application only.*
|
4249 |
|
|
|
4250 |
|
|
`manext'
|
4251 |
|
|
The file name extension for the installed man page. This should
|
4252 |
|
|
contain a period followed by the appropriate digit; it should
|
4253 |
|
|
normally be `.1'.
|
4254 |
|
|
|
4255 |
|
|
`man1ext'
|
4256 |
|
|
The file name extension for installed section 1 man pages.
|
4257 |
|
|
|
4258 |
|
|
`man2ext'
|
4259 |
|
|
The file name extension for installed section 2 man pages.
|
4260 |
|
|
|
4261 |
|
|
`...'
|
4262 |
|
|
Use these names instead of `manext' if the package needs to
|
4263 |
|
|
install man pages in more than one section of the manual.
|
4264 |
|
|
|
4265 |
|
|
And finally, you should set the following variable:
|
4266 |
|
|
|
4267 |
|
|
`srcdir'
|
4268 |
|
|
The directory for the sources being compiled. The value of this
|
4269 |
|
|
variable is normally inserted by the `configure' shell script.
|
4270 |
|
|
(If you are using Autoconf, use `srcdir = @srcdir@'.)
|
4271 |
|
|
|
4272 |
|
|
For example:
|
4273 |
|
|
|
4274 |
|
|
# Common prefix for installation directories.
|
4275 |
|
|
# NOTE: This directory must exist when you start the install.
|
4276 |
|
|
prefix = /usr/local
|
4277 |
|
|
datarootdir = $(prefix)/share
|
4278 |
|
|
datadir = $(datarootdir)
|
4279 |
|
|
exec_prefix = $(prefix)
|
4280 |
|
|
# Where to put the executable for the command `gcc'.
|
4281 |
|
|
bindir = $(exec_prefix)/bin
|
4282 |
|
|
# Where to put the directories used by the compiler.
|
4283 |
|
|
libexecdir = $(exec_prefix)/libexec
|
4284 |
|
|
# Where to put the Info files.
|
4285 |
|
|
infodir = $(datarootdir)/info
|
4286 |
|
|
|
4287 |
|
|
If your program installs a large number of files into one of the
|
4288 |
|
|
standard user-specified directories, it might be useful to group them
|
4289 |
|
|
into a subdirectory particular to that program. If you do this, you
|
4290 |
|
|
should write the `install' rule to create these subdirectories.
|
4291 |
|
|
|
4292 |
|
|
Do not expect the user to include the subdirectory name in the value
|
4293 |
|
|
of any of the variables listed above. The idea of having a uniform set
|
4294 |
|
|
of variable names for installation directories is to enable the user to
|
4295 |
|
|
specify the exact same values for several different GNU packages. In
|
4296 |
|
|
order for this to be useful, all the packages must be designed so that
|
4297 |
|
|
they will work sensibly when the user does so.
|
4298 |
|
|
|
4299 |
|
|
At times, not all of these variables may be implemented in the
|
4300 |
|
|
current release of Autoconf and/or Automake; but as of Autoconf 2.60, we
|
4301 |
|
|
believe all of them are. When any are missing, the descriptions here
|
4302 |
|
|
serve as specifications for what Autoconf will implement. As a
|
4303 |
|
|
programmer, you can either use a development version of Autoconf or
|
4304 |
|
|
avoid using these variables until a stable release is made which
|
4305 |
|
|
supports them.
|
4306 |
|
|
|
4307 |
|
|
|
4308 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Standard Targets, Next: Install Command Categories, Prev: Directory Variables, Up: Makefile Conventions
|
4309 |
|
|
|
4310 |
|
|
7.2.6 Standard Targets for Users
|
4311 |
|
|
--------------------------------
|
4312 |
|
|
|
4313 |
|
|
All GNU programs should have the following targets in their Makefiles:
|
4314 |
|
|
|
4315 |
|
|
`all'
|
4316 |
|
|
Compile the entire program. This should be the default target.
|
4317 |
|
|
This target need not rebuild any documentation files; Info files
|
4318 |
|
|
should normally be included in the distribution, and DVI (and other
|
4319 |
|
|
documentation format) files should be made only when explicitly
|
4320 |
|
|
asked for.
|
4321 |
|
|
|
4322 |
|
|
By default, the Make rules should compile and link with `-g', so
|
4323 |
|
|
that executable programs have debugging symbols. Users who don't
|
4324 |
|
|
mind being helpless can strip the executables later if they wish.
|
4325 |
|
|
|
4326 |
|
|
`install'
|
4327 |
|
|
Compile the program and copy the executables, libraries, and so on
|
4328 |
|
|
to the file names where they should reside for actual use. If
|
4329 |
|
|
there is a simple test to verify that a program is properly
|
4330 |
|
|
installed, this target should run that test.
|
4331 |
|
|
|
4332 |
|
|
Do not strip executables when installing them. Devil-may-care
|
4333 |
|
|
users can use the `install-strip' target to do that.
|
4334 |
|
|
|
4335 |
|
|
If possible, write the `install' target rule so that it does not
|
4336 |
|
|
modify anything in the directory where the program was built,
|
4337 |
|
|
provided `make all' has just been done. This is convenient for
|
4338 |
|
|
building the program under one user name and installing it under
|
4339 |
|
|
another.
|
4340 |
|
|
|
4341 |
|
|
The commands should create all the directories in which files are
|
4342 |
|
|
to be installed, if they don't already exist. This includes the
|
4343 |
|
|
directories specified as the values of the variables `prefix' and
|
4344 |
|
|
`exec_prefix', as well as all subdirectories that are needed. One
|
4345 |
|
|
way to do this is by means of an `installdirs' target as described
|
4346 |
|
|
below.
|
4347 |
|
|
|
4348 |
|
|
Use `-' before any command for installing a man page, so that
|
4349 |
|
|
`make' will ignore any errors. This is in case there are systems
|
4350 |
|
|
that don't have the Unix man page documentation system installed.
|
4351 |
|
|
|
4352 |
|
|
The way to install Info files is to copy them into `$(infodir)'
|
4353 |
|
|
with `$(INSTALL_DATA)' (*note Command Variables::), and then run
|
4354 |
|
|
the `install-info' program if it is present. `install-info' is a
|
4355 |
|
|
program that edits the Info `dir' file to add or update the menu
|
4356 |
|
|
entry for the given Info file; it is part of the Texinfo package.
|
4357 |
|
|
Here is a sample rule to install an Info file:
|
4358 |
|
|
|
4359 |
|
|
$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/foo.info: foo.info
|
4360 |
|
|
$(POST_INSTALL)
|
4361 |
|
|
# There may be a newer info file in . than in srcdir.
|
4362 |
|
|
-if test -f foo.info; then d=.; \
|
4363 |
|
|
else d=$(srcdir); fi; \
|
4364 |
|
|
$(INSTALL_DATA) $$d/foo.info $(DESTDIR)$@; \
|
4365 |
|
|
# Run install-info only if it exists.
|
4366 |
|
|
# Use `if' instead of just prepending `-' to the
|
4367 |
|
|
# line so we notice real errors from install-info.
|
4368 |
|
|
# We use `$(SHELL) -c' because some shells do not
|
4369 |
|
|
# fail gracefully when there is an unknown command.
|
4370 |
|
|
if $(SHELL) -c 'install-info --version' \
|
4371 |
|
|
>/dev/null 2>&1; then \
|
4372 |
|
|
install-info --dir-file=$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/dir \
|
4373 |
|
|
$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/foo.info; \
|
4374 |
|
|
else true; fi
|
4375 |
|
|
|
4376 |
|
|
When writing the `install' target, you must classify all the
|
4377 |
|
|
commands into three categories: normal ones, "pre-installation"
|
4378 |
|
|
commands and "post-installation" commands. *Note Install Command
|
4379 |
|
|
Categories::.
|
4380 |
|
|
|
4381 |
|
|
`install-html'
|
4382 |
|
|
`install-dvi'
|
4383 |
|
|
`install-pdf'
|
4384 |
|
|
`install-ps'
|
4385 |
|
|
These targets install documentation in formats other than Info;
|
4386 |
|
|
they're intended to be called explicitly by the person installing
|
4387 |
|
|
the package, if that format is desired. GNU prefers Info files,
|
4388 |
|
|
so these must be installed by the `install' target.
|
4389 |
|
|
|
4390 |
|
|
When you have many documentation files to install, we recommend
|
4391 |
|
|
that you avoid collisions and clutter by arranging for these
|
4392 |
|
|
targets to install in subdirectories of the appropriate
|
4393 |
|
|
installation directory, such as `htmldir'. As one example, if
|
4394 |
|
|
your package has multiple manuals, and you wish to install HTML
|
4395 |
|
|
documentation with many files (such as the "split" mode output by
|
4396 |
|
|
`makeinfo --html'), you'll certainly want to use subdirectories,
|
4397 |
|
|
or two nodes with the same name in different manuals will
|
4398 |
|
|
overwrite each other.
|
4399 |
|
|
|
4400 |
|
|
Please make these `install-FORMAT' targets invoke the commands for
|
4401 |
|
|
the FORMAT target, for example, by making FORMAT a dependency.
|
4402 |
|
|
|
4403 |
|
|
`uninstall'
|
4404 |
|
|
Delete all the installed files--the copies that the `install' and
|
4405 |
|
|
`install-*' targets create.
|
4406 |
|
|
|
4407 |
|
|
This rule should not modify the directories where compilation is
|
4408 |
|
|
done, only the directories where files are installed.
|
4409 |
|
|
|
4410 |
|
|
The uninstallation commands are divided into three categories,
|
4411 |
|
|
just like the installation commands. *Note Install Command
|
4412 |
|
|
Categories::.
|
4413 |
|
|
|
4414 |
|
|
`install-strip'
|
4415 |
|
|
Like `install', but strip the executable files while installing
|
4416 |
|
|
them. In simple cases, this target can use the `install' target in
|
4417 |
|
|
a simple way:
|
4418 |
|
|
|
4419 |
|
|
install-strip:
|
4420 |
|
|
$(MAKE) INSTALL_PROGRAM='$(INSTALL_PROGRAM) -s' \
|
4421 |
|
|
install
|
4422 |
|
|
|
4423 |
|
|
But if the package installs scripts as well as real executables,
|
4424 |
|
|
the `install-strip' target can't just refer to the `install'
|
4425 |
|
|
target; it has to strip the executables but not the scripts.
|
4426 |
|
|
|
4427 |
|
|
`install-strip' should not strip the executables in the build
|
4428 |
|
|
directory which are being copied for installation. It should only
|
4429 |
|
|
strip the copies that are installed.
|
4430 |
|
|
|
4431 |
|
|
Normally we do not recommend stripping an executable unless you
|
4432 |
|
|
are sure the program has no bugs. However, it can be reasonable
|
4433 |
|
|
to install a stripped executable for actual execution while saving
|
4434 |
|
|
the unstripped executable elsewhere in case there is a bug.
|
4435 |
|
|
|
4436 |
|
|
`clean'
|
4437 |
|
|
Delete all files in the current directory that are normally
|
4438 |
|
|
created by building the program. Also delete files in other
|
4439 |
|
|
directories if they are created by this makefile. However, don't
|
4440 |
|
|
delete the files that record the configuration. Also preserve
|
4441 |
|
|
files that could be made by building, but normally aren't because
|
4442 |
|
|
the distribution comes with them. There is no need to delete
|
4443 |
|
|
parent directories that were created with `mkdir -p', since they
|
4444 |
|
|
could have existed anyway.
|
4445 |
|
|
|
4446 |
|
|
Delete `.dvi' files here if they are not part of the distribution.
|
4447 |
|
|
|
4448 |
|
|
`distclean'
|
4449 |
|
|
Delete all files in the current directory (or created by this
|
4450 |
|
|
makefile) that are created by configuring or building the program.
|
4451 |
|
|
If you have unpacked the source and built the program without
|
4452 |
|
|
creating any other files, `make distclean' should leave only the
|
4453 |
|
|
files that were in the distribution. However, there is no need to
|
4454 |
|
|
delete parent directories that were created with `mkdir -p', since
|
4455 |
|
|
they could have existed anyway.
|
4456 |
|
|
|
4457 |
|
|
`mostlyclean'
|
4458 |
|
|
Like `clean', but may refrain from deleting a few files that people
|
4459 |
|
|
normally don't want to recompile. For example, the `mostlyclean'
|
4460 |
|
|
target for GCC does not delete `libgcc.a', because recompiling it
|
4461 |
|
|
is rarely necessary and takes a lot of time.
|
4462 |
|
|
|
4463 |
|
|
`maintainer-clean'
|
4464 |
|
|
Delete almost everything that can be reconstructed with this
|
4465 |
|
|
Makefile. This typically includes everything deleted by
|
4466 |
|
|
`distclean', plus more: C source files produced by Bison, tags
|
4467 |
|
|
tables, Info files, and so on.
|
4468 |
|
|
|
4469 |
|
|
The reason we say "almost everything" is that running the command
|
4470 |
|
|
`make maintainer-clean' should not delete `configure' even if
|
4471 |
|
|
`configure' can be remade using a rule in the Makefile. More
|
4472 |
|
|
generally, `make maintainer-clean' should not delete anything that
|
4473 |
|
|
needs to exist in order to run `configure' and then begin to build
|
4474 |
|
|
the program. Also, there is no need to delete parent directories
|
4475 |
|
|
that were created with `mkdir -p', since they could have existed
|
4476 |
|
|
anyway. These are the only exceptions; `maintainer-clean' should
|
4477 |
|
|
delete everything else that can be rebuilt.
|
4478 |
|
|
|
4479 |
|
|
The `maintainer-clean' target is intended to be used by a
|
4480 |
|
|
maintainer of the package, not by ordinary users. You may need
|
4481 |
|
|
special tools to reconstruct some of the files that `make
|
4482 |
|
|
maintainer-clean' deletes. Since these files are normally
|
4483 |
|
|
included in the distribution, we don't take care to make them easy
|
4484 |
|
|
to reconstruct. If you find you need to unpack the full
|
4485 |
|
|
distribution again, don't blame us.
|
4486 |
|
|
|
4487 |
|
|
To help make users aware of this, the commands for the special
|
4488 |
|
|
`maintainer-clean' target should start with these two:
|
4489 |
|
|
|
4490 |
|
|
@echo 'This command is intended for maintainers to use; it'
|
4491 |
|
|
@echo 'deletes files that may need special tools to rebuild.'
|
4492 |
|
|
|
4493 |
|
|
`TAGS'
|
4494 |
|
|
Update a tags table for this program.
|
4495 |
|
|
|
4496 |
|
|
`info'
|
4497 |
|
|
Generate any Info files needed. The best way to write the rules
|
4498 |
|
|
is as follows:
|
4499 |
|
|
|
4500 |
|
|
info: foo.info
|
4501 |
|
|
|
4502 |
|
|
foo.info: foo.texi chap1.texi chap2.texi
|
4503 |
|
|
$(MAKEINFO) $(srcdir)/foo.texi
|
4504 |
|
|
|
4505 |
|
|
You must define the variable `MAKEINFO' in the Makefile. It should
|
4506 |
|
|
run the `makeinfo' program, which is part of the Texinfo
|
4507 |
|
|
distribution.
|
4508 |
|
|
|
4509 |
|
|
Normally a GNU distribution comes with Info files, and that means
|
4510 |
|
|
the Info files are present in the source directory. Therefore,
|
4511 |
|
|
the Make rule for an info file should update it in the source
|
4512 |
|
|
directory. When users build the package, ordinarily Make will not
|
4513 |
|
|
update the Info files because they will already be up to date.
|
4514 |
|
|
|
4515 |
|
|
`dvi'
|
4516 |
|
|
`html'
|
4517 |
|
|
`pdf'
|
4518 |
|
|
`ps'
|
4519 |
|
|
Generate documentation files in the given format. These targets
|
4520 |
|
|
should always exist, but any or all can be a no-op if the given
|
4521 |
|
|
output format cannot be generated. These targets should not be
|
4522 |
|
|
dependencies of the `all' target; the user must manually invoke
|
4523 |
|
|
them.
|
4524 |
|
|
|
4525 |
|
|
Here's an example rule for generating DVI files from Texinfo:
|
4526 |
|
|
|
4527 |
|
|
dvi: foo.dvi
|
4528 |
|
|
|
4529 |
|
|
foo.dvi: foo.texi chap1.texi chap2.texi
|
4530 |
|
|
$(TEXI2DVI) $(srcdir)/foo.texi
|
4531 |
|
|
|
4532 |
|
|
You must define the variable `TEXI2DVI' in the Makefile. It should
|
4533 |
|
|
run the program `texi2dvi', which is part of the Texinfo
|
4534 |
|
|
distribution.(1) Alternatively, write just the dependencies, and
|
4535 |
|
|
allow GNU `make' to provide the command.
|
4536 |
|
|
|
4537 |
|
|
Here's another example, this one for generating HTML from Texinfo:
|
4538 |
|
|
|
4539 |
|
|
html: foo.html
|
4540 |
|
|
|
4541 |
|
|
foo.html: foo.texi chap1.texi chap2.texi
|
4542 |
|
|
$(TEXI2HTML) $(srcdir)/foo.texi
|
4543 |
|
|
|
4544 |
|
|
Again, you would define the variable `TEXI2HTML' in the Makefile;
|
4545 |
|
|
for example, it might run `makeinfo --no-split --html' (`makeinfo'
|
4546 |
|
|
is part of the Texinfo distribution).
|
4547 |
|
|
|
4548 |
|
|
`dist'
|
4549 |
|
|
Create a distribution tar file for this program. The tar file
|
4550 |
|
|
should be set up so that the file names in the tar file start with
|
4551 |
|
|
a subdirectory name which is the name of the package it is a
|
4552 |
|
|
distribution for. This name can include the version number.
|
4553 |
|
|
|
4554 |
|
|
For example, the distribution tar file of GCC version 1.40 unpacks
|
4555 |
|
|
into a subdirectory named `gcc-1.40'.
|
4556 |
|
|
|
4557 |
|
|
The easiest way to do this is to create a subdirectory
|
4558 |
|
|
appropriately named, use `ln' or `cp' to install the proper files
|
4559 |
|
|
in it, and then `tar' that subdirectory.
|
4560 |
|
|
|
4561 |
|
|
Compress the tar file with `gzip'. For example, the actual
|
4562 |
|
|
distribution file for GCC version 1.40 is called `gcc-1.40.tar.gz'.
|
4563 |
|
|
|
4564 |
|
|
The `dist' target should explicitly depend on all non-source files
|
4565 |
|
|
that are in the distribution, to make sure they are up to date in
|
4566 |
|
|
the distribution. *Note Making Releases: Releases.
|
4567 |
|
|
|
4568 |
|
|
`check'
|
4569 |
|
|
Perform self-tests (if any). The user must build the program
|
4570 |
|
|
before running the tests, but need not install the program; you
|
4571 |
|
|
should write the self-tests so that they work when the program is
|
4572 |
|
|
built but not installed.
|
4573 |
|
|
|
4574 |
|
|
The following targets are suggested as conventional names, for
|
4575 |
|
|
programs in which they are useful.
|
4576 |
|
|
|
4577 |
|
|
`installcheck'
|
4578 |
|
|
Perform installation tests (if any). The user must build and
|
4579 |
|
|
install the program before running the tests. You should not
|
4580 |
|
|
assume that `$(bindir)' is in the search path.
|
4581 |
|
|
|
4582 |
|
|
`installdirs'
|
4583 |
|
|
It's useful to add a target named `installdirs' to create the
|
4584 |
|
|
directories where files are installed, and their parent
|
4585 |
|
|
directories. There is a script called `mkinstalldirs' which is
|
4586 |
|
|
convenient for this; you can find it in the Texinfo package. You
|
4587 |
|
|
can use a rule like this:
|
4588 |
|
|
|
4589 |
|
|
# Make sure all installation directories (e.g. $(bindir))
|
4590 |
|
|
# actually exist by making them if necessary.
|
4591 |
|
|
installdirs: mkinstalldirs
|
4592 |
|
|
$(srcdir)/mkinstalldirs $(bindir) $(datadir) \
|
4593 |
|
|
$(libdir) $(infodir) \
|
4594 |
|
|
$(mandir)
|
4595 |
|
|
|
4596 |
|
|
or, if you wish to support `DESTDIR',
|
4597 |
|
|
|
4598 |
|
|
# Make sure all installation directories (e.g. $(bindir))
|
4599 |
|
|
# actually exist by making them if necessary.
|
4600 |
|
|
installdirs: mkinstalldirs
|
4601 |
|
|
$(srcdir)/mkinstalldirs \
|
4602 |
|
|
$(DESTDIR)$(bindir) $(DESTDIR)$(datadir) \
|
4603 |
|
|
$(DESTDIR)$(libdir) $(DESTDIR)$(infodir) \
|
4604 |
|
|
$(DESTDIR)$(mandir)
|
4605 |
|
|
|
4606 |
|
|
This rule should not modify the directories where compilation is
|
4607 |
|
|
done. It should do nothing but create installation directories.
|
4608 |
|
|
|
4609 |
|
|
---------- Footnotes ----------
|
4610 |
|
|
|
4611 |
|
|
(1) `texi2dvi' uses TeX to do the real work of formatting. TeX is
|
4612 |
|
|
not distributed with Texinfo.
|
4613 |
|
|
|
4614 |
|
|
|
4615 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Install Command Categories, Prev: Standard Targets, Up: Makefile Conventions
|
4616 |
|
|
|
4617 |
|
|
7.2.7 Install Command Categories
|
4618 |
|
|
--------------------------------
|
4619 |
|
|
|
4620 |
|
|
When writing the `install' target, you must classify all the commands
|
4621 |
|
|
into three categories: normal ones, "pre-installation" commands and
|
4622 |
|
|
"post-installation" commands.
|
4623 |
|
|
|
4624 |
|
|
Normal commands move files into their proper places, and set their
|
4625 |
|
|
modes. They may not alter any files except the ones that come entirely
|
4626 |
|
|
from the package they belong to.
|
4627 |
|
|
|
4628 |
|
|
Pre-installation and post-installation commands may alter other
|
4629 |
|
|
files; in particular, they can edit global configuration files or data
|
4630 |
|
|
bases.
|
4631 |
|
|
|
4632 |
|
|
Pre-installation commands are typically executed before the normal
|
4633 |
|
|
commands, and post-installation commands are typically run after the
|
4634 |
|
|
normal commands.
|
4635 |
|
|
|
4636 |
|
|
The most common use for a post-installation command is to run
|
4637 |
|
|
`install-info'. This cannot be done with a normal command, since it
|
4638 |
|
|
alters a file (the Info directory) which does not come entirely and
|
4639 |
|
|
solely from the package being installed. It is a post-installation
|
4640 |
|
|
command because it needs to be done after the normal command which
|
4641 |
|
|
installs the package's Info files.
|
4642 |
|
|
|
4643 |
|
|
Most programs don't need any pre-installation commands, but we have
|
4644 |
|
|
the feature just in case it is needed.
|
4645 |
|
|
|
4646 |
|
|
To classify the commands in the `install' rule into these three
|
4647 |
|
|
categories, insert "category lines" among them. A category line
|
4648 |
|
|
specifies the category for the commands that follow.
|
4649 |
|
|
|
4650 |
|
|
A category line consists of a tab and a reference to a special Make
|
4651 |
|
|
variable, plus an optional comment at the end. There are three
|
4652 |
|
|
variables you can use, one for each category; the variable name
|
4653 |
|
|
specifies the category. Category lines are no-ops in ordinary execution
|
4654 |
|
|
because these three Make variables are normally undefined (and you
|
4655 |
|
|
_should not_ define them in the makefile).
|
4656 |
|
|
|
4657 |
|
|
Here are the three possible category lines, each with a comment that
|
4658 |
|
|
explains what it means:
|
4659 |
|
|
|
4660 |
|
|
$(PRE_INSTALL) # Pre-install commands follow.
|
4661 |
|
|
$(POST_INSTALL) # Post-install commands follow.
|
4662 |
|
|
$(NORMAL_INSTALL) # Normal commands follow.
|
4663 |
|
|
|
4664 |
|
|
If you don't use a category line at the beginning of the `install'
|
4665 |
|
|
rule, all the commands are classified as normal until the first category
|
4666 |
|
|
line. If you don't use any category lines, all the commands are
|
4667 |
|
|
classified as normal.
|
4668 |
|
|
|
4669 |
|
|
These are the category lines for `uninstall':
|
4670 |
|
|
|
4671 |
|
|
$(PRE_UNINSTALL) # Pre-uninstall commands follow.
|
4672 |
|
|
$(POST_UNINSTALL) # Post-uninstall commands follow.
|
4673 |
|
|
$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL) # Normal commands follow.
|
4674 |
|
|
|
4675 |
|
|
Typically, a pre-uninstall command would be used for deleting entries
|
4676 |
|
|
from the Info directory.
|
4677 |
|
|
|
4678 |
|
|
If the `install' or `uninstall' target has any dependencies which
|
4679 |
|
|
act as subroutines of installation, then you should start _each_
|
4680 |
|
|
dependency's commands with a category line, and start the main target's
|
4681 |
|
|
commands with a category line also. This way, you can ensure that each
|
4682 |
|
|
command is placed in the right category regardless of which of the
|
4683 |
|
|
dependencies actually run.
|
4684 |
|
|
|
4685 |
|
|
Pre-installation and post-installation commands should not run any
|
4686 |
|
|
programs except for these:
|
4687 |
|
|
|
4688 |
|
|
[ basename bash cat chgrp chmod chown cmp cp dd diff echo
|
4689 |
|
|
egrep expand expr false fgrep find getopt grep gunzip gzip
|
4690 |
|
|
hostname install install-info kill ldconfig ln ls md5sum
|
4691 |
|
|
mkdir mkfifo mknod mv printenv pwd rm rmdir sed sort tee
|
4692 |
|
|
test touch true uname xargs yes
|
4693 |
|
|
|
4694 |
|
|
The reason for distinguishing the commands in this way is for the
|
4695 |
|
|
sake of making binary packages. Typically a binary package contains
|
4696 |
|
|
all the executables and other files that need to be installed, and has
|
4697 |
|
|
its own method of installing them--so it does not need to run the normal
|
4698 |
|
|
installation commands. But installing the binary package does need to
|
4699 |
|
|
execute the pre-installation and post-installation commands.
|
4700 |
|
|
|
4701 |
|
|
Programs to build binary packages work by extracting the
|
4702 |
|
|
pre-installation and post-installation commands. Here is one way of
|
4703 |
|
|
extracting the pre-installation commands (the `-s' option to `make' is
|
4704 |
|
|
needed to silence messages about entering subdirectories):
|
4705 |
|
|
|
4706 |
|
|
make -s -n install -o all \
|
4707 |
|
|
PRE_INSTALL=pre-install \
|
4708 |
|
|
POST_INSTALL=post-install \
|
4709 |
|
|
NORMAL_INSTALL=normal-install \
|
4710 |
|
|
| gawk -f pre-install.awk
|
4711 |
|
|
|
4712 |
|
|
where the file `pre-install.awk' could contain this:
|
4713 |
|
|
|
4714 |
|
|
$0 ~ /^(normal-install|post-install)[ \t]*$/ {on = 0}
|
4715 |
|
|
on {print $0}
|
4716 |
|
|
$0 ~ /^pre-install[ \t]*$/ {on = 1}
|
4717 |
|
|
|
4718 |
|
|
|
4719 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Releases, Prev: Makefile Conventions, Up: Managing Releases
|
4720 |
|
|
|
4721 |
|
|
7.3 Making Releases
|
4722 |
|
|
===================
|
4723 |
|
|
|
4724 |
|
|
You should identify each release with a pair of version numbers, a
|
4725 |
|
|
major version and a minor. We have no objection to using more than two
|
4726 |
|
|
numbers, but it is very unlikely that you really need them.
|
4727 |
|
|
|
4728 |
|
|
Package the distribution of `Foo version 69.96' up in a gzipped tar
|
4729 |
|
|
file with the name `foo-69.96.tar.gz'. It should unpack into a
|
4730 |
|
|
subdirectory named `foo-69.96'.
|
4731 |
|
|
|
4732 |
|
|
Building and installing the program should never modify any of the
|
4733 |
|
|
files contained in the distribution. This means that all the files
|
4734 |
|
|
that form part of the program in any way must be classified into "source
|
4735 |
|
|
files" and "non-source files". Source files are written by humans and
|
4736 |
|
|
never changed automatically; non-source files are produced from source
|
4737 |
|
|
files by programs under the control of the Makefile.
|
4738 |
|
|
|
4739 |
|
|
The distribution should contain a file named `README' which gives
|
4740 |
|
|
the name of the package, and a general description of what it does. It
|
4741 |
|
|
is also good to explain the purpose of each of the first-level
|
4742 |
|
|
subdirectories in the package, if there are any. The `README' file
|
4743 |
|
|
should either state the version number of the package, or refer to where
|
4744 |
|
|
in the package it can be found.
|
4745 |
|
|
|
4746 |
|
|
The `README' file should refer to the file `INSTALL', which should
|
4747 |
|
|
contain an explanation of the installation procedure.
|
4748 |
|
|
|
4749 |
|
|
The `README' file should also refer to the file which contains the
|
4750 |
|
|
copying conditions. The GNU GPL, if used, should be in a file called
|
4751 |
|
|
`COPYING'. If the GNU LGPL is used, it should be in a file called
|
4752 |
|
|
`COPYING.LIB'.
|
4753 |
|
|
|
4754 |
|
|
Naturally, all the source files must be in the distribution. It is
|
4755 |
|
|
okay to include non-source files in the distribution, provided they are
|
4756 |
|
|
up-to-date and machine-independent, so that building the distribution
|
4757 |
|
|
normally will never modify them. We commonly include non-source files
|
4758 |
|
|
produced by Bison, `lex', TeX, and `makeinfo'; this helps avoid
|
4759 |
|
|
unnecessary dependencies between our distributions, so that users can
|
4760 |
|
|
install whichever packages they want to install.
|
4761 |
|
|
|
4762 |
|
|
Non-source files that might actually be modified by building and
|
4763 |
|
|
installing the program should *never* be included in the distribution.
|
4764 |
|
|
So if you do distribute non-source files, always make sure they are up
|
4765 |
|
|
to date when you make a new distribution.
|
4766 |
|
|
|
4767 |
|
|
Make sure that the directory into which the distribution unpacks (as
|
4768 |
|
|
well as any subdirectories) are all world-writable (octal mode 777).
|
4769 |
|
|
This is so that old versions of `tar' which preserve the ownership and
|
4770 |
|
|
permissions of the files from the tar archive will be able to extract
|
4771 |
|
|
all the files even if the user is unprivileged.
|
4772 |
|
|
|
4773 |
|
|
Make sure that all the files in the distribution are world-readable.
|
4774 |
|
|
|
4775 |
|
|
Don't include any symbolic links in the distribution itself. If the
|
4776 |
|
|
tar file contains symbolic links, then people cannot even unpack it on
|
4777 |
|
|
systems that don't support symbolic links. Also, don't use multiple
|
4778 |
|
|
names for one file in different directories, because certain file
|
4779 |
|
|
systems cannot handle this and that prevents unpacking the distribution.
|
4780 |
|
|
|
4781 |
|
|
Try to make sure that all the file names will be unique on MS-DOS. A
|
4782 |
|
|
name on MS-DOS consists of up to 8 characters, optionally followed by a
|
4783 |
|
|
period and up to three characters. MS-DOS will truncate extra
|
4784 |
|
|
characters both before and after the period. Thus, `foobarhacker.c'
|
4785 |
|
|
and `foobarhacker.o' are not ambiguous; they are truncated to
|
4786 |
|
|
`foobarha.c' and `foobarha.o', which are distinct.
|
4787 |
|
|
|
4788 |
|
|
Include in your distribution a copy of the `texinfo.tex' you used to
|
4789 |
|
|
test print any `*.texinfo' or `*.texi' files.
|
4790 |
|
|
|
4791 |
|
|
Likewise, if your program uses small GNU software packages like
|
4792 |
|
|
regex, getopt, obstack, or termcap, include them in the distribution
|
4793 |
|
|
file. Leaving them out would make the distribution file a little
|
4794 |
|
|
smaller at the expense of possible inconvenience to a user who doesn't
|
4795 |
|
|
know what other files to get.
|
4796 |
|
|
|
4797 |
|
|
|
4798 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: References, Next: GNU Free Documentation License, Prev: Managing Releases, Up: Top
|
4799 |
|
|
|
4800 |
|
|
8 References to Non-Free Software and Documentation
|
4801 |
|
|
***************************************************
|
4802 |
|
|
|
4803 |
|
|
A GNU program should not recommend use of any non-free program. We
|
4804 |
|
|
can't stop some people from writing proprietary programs, or stop other
|
4805 |
|
|
people from using them, but we can and should refuse to advertise them
|
4806 |
|
|
to new potential customers. Proprietary software is a social and
|
4807 |
|
|
ethical problem, and the point of GNU is to solve that problem.
|
4808 |
|
|
|
4809 |
|
|
The GNU definition of free software is found on the GNU web site at
|
4810 |
|
|
`http://www.gnu.org/philosophy/free-sw.html', and the definition of
|
4811 |
|
|
free documentation is found at
|
4812 |
|
|
`http://www.gnu.org/philosophy/free-doc.html'. A list of important
|
4813 |
|
|
licenses and whether they qualify as free is in
|
4814 |
|
|
`http://www.gnu.org/licenses/license-list.html'. The terms "free" and
|
4815 |
|
|
"non-free", used in this document, refer to that definition. If it is
|
4816 |
|
|
not clear whether a license qualifies as free under this definition,
|
4817 |
|
|
please ask the GNU Project by writing to . We will
|
4818 |
|
|
answer, and if the license is an important one, we will add it to the
|
4819 |
|
|
list.
|
4820 |
|
|
|
4821 |
|
|
When a non-free program or system is well known, you can mention it
|
4822 |
|
|
in passing--that is harmless, since users who might want to use it
|
4823 |
|
|
probably already know about it. For instance, it is fine to explain
|
4824 |
|
|
how to build your package on top of some widely used non-free operating
|
4825 |
|
|
system, or how to use it together with some widely used non-free
|
4826 |
|
|
program.
|
4827 |
|
|
|
4828 |
|
|
However, you should give only the necessary information to help those
|
4829 |
|
|
who already use the non-free program to use your program with it--don't
|
4830 |
|
|
give, or refer to, any further information about the proprietary
|
4831 |
|
|
program, and don't imply that the proprietary program enhances your
|
4832 |
|
|
program, or that its existence is in any way a good thing. The goal
|
4833 |
|
|
should be that people already using the proprietary program will get
|
4834 |
|
|
the advice they need about how to use your free program with it, while
|
4835 |
|
|
people who don't already use the proprietary program will not see
|
4836 |
|
|
anything to lead them to take an interest in it.
|
4837 |
|
|
|
4838 |
|
|
If a non-free program or system is obscure in your program's domain,
|
4839 |
|
|
your program should not mention or support it at all, since doing so
|
4840 |
|
|
would tend to popularize the non-free program more than it popularizes
|
4841 |
|
|
your program. (You cannot hope to find many additional users among the
|
4842 |
|
|
users of Foobar if the users of Foobar are few.)
|
4843 |
|
|
|
4844 |
|
|
Sometimes a program is free software in itself but depends on a
|
4845 |
|
|
non-free platform in order to run. For instance, many Java programs
|
4846 |
|
|
depend on the parts of Sun's Java implementation which are not yet free
|
4847 |
|
|
software, and won't run on the GNU Java Compiler (which does not yet
|
4848 |
|
|
have all the features) or won't run with the GNU Java libraries. We
|
4849 |
|
|
hope this particular problem will be gone in a few months, when Sun
|
4850 |
|
|
makes the standard Java libraries free software, but of course the
|
4851 |
|
|
general principle remains: you should not recommend programs that
|
4852 |
|
|
depend on non-free software to run.
|
4853 |
|
|
|
4854 |
|
|
Some free programs encourage the use of non-free software. A typical
|
4855 |
|
|
example is `mplayer'. It is free software in itself, and the free code
|
4856 |
|
|
can handle some kinds of files. However, `mplayer' recommends use of
|
4857 |
|
|
non-free codecs for other kinds of files, and users that install
|
4858 |
|
|
`mplayer' are very likely to install those codecs along with it. To
|
4859 |
|
|
recommend `mplayer' is, in effect, to recommend the non-free codecs.
|
4860 |
|
|
We must not do that, so we cannot recommend `mplayer' either.
|
4861 |
|
|
|
4862 |
|
|
In general, you should also not recommend programs that themselves
|
4863 |
|
|
strongly recommend the use of non-free software.
|
4864 |
|
|
|
4865 |
|
|
A GNU package should not refer the user to any non-free documentation
|
4866 |
|
|
for free software. Free documentation that can be included in free
|
4867 |
|
|
operating systems is essential for completing the GNU system, or any
|
4868 |
|
|
free operating system, so it is a major focus of the GNU Project; to
|
4869 |
|
|
recommend use of documentation that we are not allowed to use in GNU
|
4870 |
|
|
would weaken the impetus for the community to produce documentation
|
4871 |
|
|
that we can include. So GNU packages should never recommend non-free
|
4872 |
|
|
documentation.
|
4873 |
|
|
|
4874 |
|
|
By contrast, it is ok to refer to journal articles and textbooks in
|
4875 |
|
|
the comments of a program for explanation of how it functions, even
|
4876 |
|
|
though they be non-free. This is because we don't include such things
|
4877 |
|
|
in the GNU system even if we are allowed to--they are outside the scope
|
4878 |
|
|
of an operating system project.
|
4879 |
|
|
|
4880 |
|
|
Referring to a web site that describes or recommends a non-free
|
4881 |
|
|
program is in effect promoting that software, so please do not make
|
4882 |
|
|
links (or mention by name) web sites that contain such material. This
|
4883 |
|
|
policy is relevant particularly for the web pages for a GNU package.
|
4884 |
|
|
|
4885 |
|
|
Following links from nearly any web site can lead to non-free
|
4886 |
|
|
software; this is an inescapable aspect of the nature of the web, and
|
4887 |
|
|
in itself is no objection to linking to a site. As long as the site
|
4888 |
|
|
does not itself recommend a non-free program, there is no need be
|
4889 |
|
|
concerned about the sites it links to for other reasons.
|
4890 |
|
|
|
4891 |
|
|
Thus, for example, you should not make a link to AT&T's web site,
|
4892 |
|
|
because that recommends AT&T's non-free software packages; you should
|
4893 |
|
|
not make a link to a site that links to AT&T's site saying it is a
|
4894 |
|
|
place to get a non-free program; but if a site you want to link to
|
4895 |
|
|
refers to AT&T's web site in some other context (such as long-distance
|
4896 |
|
|
telephone service), that is not a problem.
|
4897 |
|
|
|
4898 |
|
|
|
4899 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: GNU Free Documentation License, Next: Index, Prev: References, Up: Top
|
4900 |
|
|
|
4901 |
|
|
Appendix A GNU Free Documentation License
|
4902 |
|
|
*****************************************
|
4903 |
|
|
|
4904 |
|
|
Version 1.2, November 2002
|
4905 |
|
|
|
4906 |
|
|
Copyright (C) 2000,2001,2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
|
4907 |
|
|
51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA
|
4908 |
|
|
|
4909 |
|
|
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
|
4910 |
|
|
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
|
4911 |
|
|
|
4912 |
|
|
0. PREAMBLE
|
4913 |
|
|
|
4914 |
|
|
The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other
|
4915 |
|
|
functional and useful document "free" in the sense of freedom: to
|
4916 |
|
|
assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it,
|
4917 |
|
|
with or without modifying it, either commercially or
|
4918 |
|
|
noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves for the
|
4919 |
|
|
author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not
|
4920 |
|
|
being considered responsible for modifications made by others.
|
4921 |
|
|
|
4922 |
|
|
This License is a kind of "copyleft", which means that derivative
|
4923 |
|
|
works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense.
|
4924 |
|
|
It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft
|
4925 |
|
|
license designed for free software.
|
4926 |
|
|
|
4927 |
|
|
We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for
|
4928 |
|
|
free software, because free software needs free documentation: a
|
4929 |
|
|
free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms
|
4930 |
|
|
that the software does. But this License is not limited to
|
4931 |
|
|
software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless
|
4932 |
|
|
of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book.
|
4933 |
|
|
We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is
|
4934 |
|
|
instruction or reference.
|
4935 |
|
|
|
4936 |
|
|
1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS
|
4937 |
|
|
|
4938 |
|
|
This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium,
|
4939 |
|
|
that contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it
|
4940 |
|
|
can be distributed under the terms of this License. Such a notice
|
4941 |
|
|
grants a world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration,
|
4942 |
|
|
to use that work under the conditions stated herein. The
|
4943 |
|
|
"Document", below, refers to any such manual or work. Any member
|
4944 |
|
|
of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as "you". You
|
4945 |
|
|
accept the license if you copy, modify or distribute the work in a
|
4946 |
|
|
way requiring permission under copyright law.
|
4947 |
|
|
|
4948 |
|
|
A "Modified Version" of the Document means any work containing the
|
4949 |
|
|
Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with
|
4950 |
|
|
modifications and/or translated into another language.
|
4951 |
|
|
|
4952 |
|
|
A "Secondary Section" is a named appendix or a front-matter section
|
4953 |
|
|
of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the
|
4954 |
|
|
publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall
|
4955 |
|
|
subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could
|
4956 |
|
|
fall directly within that overall subject. (Thus, if the Document
|
4957 |
|
|
is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not
|
4958 |
|
|
explain any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter of
|
4959 |
|
|
historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or
|
4960 |
|
|
of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position
|
4961 |
|
|
regarding them.
|
4962 |
|
|
|
4963 |
|
|
The "Invariant Sections" are certain Secondary Sections whose
|
4964 |
|
|
titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in
|
4965 |
|
|
the notice that says that the Document is released under this
|
4966 |
|
|
License. If a section does not fit the above definition of
|
4967 |
|
|
Secondary then it is not allowed to be designated as Invariant.
|
4968 |
|
|
The Document may contain zero Invariant Sections. If the Document
|
4969 |
|
|
does not identify any Invariant Sections then there are none.
|
4970 |
|
|
|
4971 |
|
|
The "Cover Texts" are certain short passages of text that are
|
4972 |
|
|
listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice
|
4973 |
|
|
that says that the Document is released under this License. A
|
4974 |
|
|
Front-Cover Text may be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may
|
4975 |
|
|
be at most 25 words.
|
4976 |
|
|
|
4977 |
|
|
A "Transparent" copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy,
|
4978 |
|
|
represented in a format whose specification is available to the
|
4979 |
|
|
general public, that is suitable for revising the document
|
4980 |
|
|
straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images
|
4981 |
|
|
composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some
|
4982 |
|
|
widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to
|
4983 |
|
|
text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of
|
4984 |
|
|
formats suitable for input to text formatters. A copy made in an
|
4985 |
|
|
otherwise Transparent file format whose markup, or absence of
|
4986 |
|
|
markup, has been arranged to thwart or discourage subsequent
|
4987 |
|
|
modification by readers is not Transparent. An image format is
|
4988 |
|
|
not Transparent if used for any substantial amount of text. A
|
4989 |
|
|
copy that is not "Transparent" is called "Opaque".
|
4990 |
|
|
|
4991 |
|
|
Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain
|
4992 |
|
|
ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format,
|
4993 |
|
|
SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and
|
4994 |
|
|
standard-conforming simple HTML, PostScript or PDF designed for
|
4995 |
|
|
human modification. Examples of transparent image formats include
|
4996 |
|
|
PNG, XCF and JPG. Opaque formats include proprietary formats that
|
4997 |
|
|
can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML or
|
4998 |
|
|
XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally
|
4999 |
|
|
available, and the machine-generated HTML, PostScript or PDF
|
5000 |
|
|
produced by some word processors for output purposes only.
|
5001 |
|
|
|
5002 |
|
|
The "Title Page" means, for a printed book, the title page itself,
|
5003 |
|
|
plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the
|
5004 |
|
|
material this License requires to appear in the title page. For
|
5005 |
|
|
works in formats which do not have any title page as such, "Title
|
5006 |
|
|
Page" means the text near the most prominent appearance of the
|
5007 |
|
|
work's title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text.
|
5008 |
|
|
|
5009 |
|
|
A section "Entitled XYZ" means a named subunit of the Document
|
5010 |
|
|
whose title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses
|
5011 |
|
|
following text that translates XYZ in another language. (Here XYZ
|
5012 |
|
|
stands for a specific section name mentioned below, such as
|
5013 |
|
|
"Acknowledgements", "Dedications", "Endorsements", or "History".)
|
5014 |
|
|
To "Preserve the Title" of such a section when you modify the
|
5015 |
|
|
Document means that it remains a section "Entitled XYZ" according
|
5016 |
|
|
to this definition.
|
5017 |
|
|
|
5018 |
|
|
The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice
|
5019 |
|
|
which states that this License applies to the Document. These
|
5020 |
|
|
Warranty Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in
|
5021 |
|
|
this License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other
|
5022 |
|
|
implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and
|
5023 |
|
|
has no effect on the meaning of this License.
|
5024 |
|
|
|
5025 |
|
|
2. VERBATIM COPYING
|
5026 |
|
|
|
5027 |
|
|
You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either
|
5028 |
|
|
commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the
|
5029 |
|
|
copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License
|
5030 |
|
|
applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you
|
5031 |
|
|
add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You
|
5032 |
|
|
may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading
|
5033 |
|
|
or further copying of the copies you make or distribute. However,
|
5034 |
|
|
you may accept compensation in exchange for copies. If you
|
5035 |
|
|
distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow
|
5036 |
|
|
the conditions in section 3.
|
5037 |
|
|
|
5038 |
|
|
You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above,
|
5039 |
|
|
and you may publicly display copies.
|
5040 |
|
|
|
5041 |
|
|
3. COPYING IN QUANTITY
|
5042 |
|
|
|
5043 |
|
|
If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly
|
5044 |
|
|
have printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and
|
5045 |
|
|
the Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you must
|
5046 |
|
|
enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all
|
5047 |
|
|
these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and
|
5048 |
|
|
Back-Cover Texts on the back cover. Both covers must also clearly
|
5049 |
|
|
and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies. The
|
5050 |
|
|
front cover must present the full title with all words of the
|
5051 |
|
|
title equally prominent and visible. You may add other material
|
5052 |
|
|
on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the
|
5053 |
|
|
covers, as long as they preserve the title of the Document and
|
5054 |
|
|
satisfy these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in
|
5055 |
|
|
other respects.
|
5056 |
|
|
|
5057 |
|
|
If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit
|
5058 |
|
|
legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit
|
5059 |
|
|
reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto
|
5060 |
|
|
adjacent pages.
|
5061 |
|
|
|
5062 |
|
|
If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document
|
5063 |
|
|
numbering more than 100, you must either include a
|
5064 |
|
|
machine-readable Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy, or
|
5065 |
|
|
state in or with each Opaque copy a computer-network location from
|
5066 |
|
|
which the general network-using public has access to download
|
5067 |
|
|
using public-standard network protocols a complete Transparent
|
5068 |
|
|
copy of the Document, free of added material. If you use the
|
5069 |
|
|
latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you
|
5070 |
|
|
begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that
|
5071 |
|
|
this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated
|
5072 |
|
|
location until at least one year after the last time you
|
5073 |
|
|
distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or
|
5074 |
|
|
retailers) of that edition to the public.
|
5075 |
|
|
|
5076 |
|
|
It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of
|
5077 |
|
|
the Document well before redistributing any large number of
|
5078 |
|
|
copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated
|
5079 |
|
|
version of the Document.
|
5080 |
|
|
|
5081 |
|
|
4. MODIFICATIONS
|
5082 |
|
|
|
5083 |
|
|
You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document
|
5084 |
|
|
under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you
|
5085 |
|
|
release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with
|
5086 |
|
|
the Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus
|
5087 |
|
|
licensing distribution and modification of the Modified Version to
|
5088 |
|
|
whoever possesses a copy of it. In addition, you must do these
|
5089 |
|
|
things in the Modified Version:
|
5090 |
|
|
|
5091 |
|
|
A. Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title
|
5092 |
|
|
distinct from that of the Document, and from those of
|
5093 |
|
|
previous versions (which should, if there were any, be listed
|
5094 |
|
|
in the History section of the Document). You may use the
|
5095 |
|
|
same title as a previous version if the original publisher of
|
5096 |
|
|
that version gives permission.
|
5097 |
|
|
|
5098 |
|
|
B. List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or
|
5099 |
|
|
entities responsible for authorship of the modifications in
|
5100 |
|
|
the Modified Version, together with at least five of the
|
5101 |
|
|
principal authors of the Document (all of its principal
|
5102 |
|
|
authors, if it has fewer than five), unless they release you
|
5103 |
|
|
from this requirement.
|
5104 |
|
|
|
5105 |
|
|
C. State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the
|
5106 |
|
|
Modified Version, as the publisher.
|
5107 |
|
|
|
5108 |
|
|
D. Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document.
|
5109 |
|
|
|
5110 |
|
|
E. Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications
|
5111 |
|
|
adjacent to the other copyright notices.
|
5112 |
|
|
|
5113 |
|
|
F. Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license
|
5114 |
|
|
notice giving the public permission to use the Modified
|
5115 |
|
|
Version under the terms of this License, in the form shown in
|
5116 |
|
|
the Addendum below.
|
5117 |
|
|
|
5118 |
|
|
G. Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant
|
5119 |
|
|
Sections and required Cover Texts given in the Document's
|
5120 |
|
|
license notice.
|
5121 |
|
|
|
5122 |
|
|
H. Include an unaltered copy of this License.
|
5123 |
|
|
|
5124 |
|
|
I. Preserve the section Entitled "History", Preserve its Title,
|
5125 |
|
|
and add to it an item stating at least the title, year, new
|
5126 |
|
|
authors, and publisher of the Modified Version as given on
|
5127 |
|
|
the Title Page. If there is no section Entitled "History" in
|
5128 |
|
|
the Document, create one stating the title, year, authors,
|
5129 |
|
|
and publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page,
|
5130 |
|
|
then add an item describing the Modified Version as stated in
|
5131 |
|
|
the previous sentence.
|
5132 |
|
|
|
5133 |
|
|
J. Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document
|
5134 |
|
|
for public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and
|
5135 |
|
|
likewise the network locations given in the Document for
|
5136 |
|
|
previous versions it was based on. These may be placed in
|
5137 |
|
|
the "History" section. You may omit a network location for a
|
5138 |
|
|
work that was published at least four years before the
|
5139 |
|
|
Document itself, or if the original publisher of the version
|
5140 |
|
|
it refers to gives permission.
|
5141 |
|
|
|
5142 |
|
|
K. For any section Entitled "Acknowledgements" or "Dedications",
|
5143 |
|
|
Preserve the Title of the section, and preserve in the
|
5144 |
|
|
section all the substance and tone of each of the contributor
|
5145 |
|
|
acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein.
|
5146 |
|
|
|
5147 |
|
|
L. Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document,
|
5148 |
|
|
unaltered in their text and in their titles. Section numbers
|
5149 |
|
|
or the equivalent are not considered part of the section
|
5150 |
|
|
titles.
|
5151 |
|
|
|
5152 |
|
|
M. Delete any section Entitled "Endorsements". Such a section
|
5153 |
|
|
may not be included in the Modified Version.
|
5154 |
|
|
|
5155 |
|
|
N. Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled
|
5156 |
|
|
"Endorsements" or to conflict in title with any Invariant
|
5157 |
|
|
Section.
|
5158 |
|
|
|
5159 |
|
|
O. Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers.
|
5160 |
|
|
|
5161 |
|
|
If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or
|
5162 |
|
|
appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no
|
5163 |
|
|
material copied from the Document, you may at your option
|
5164 |
|
|
designate some or all of these sections as invariant. To do this,
|
5165 |
|
|
add their titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified
|
5166 |
|
|
Version's license notice. These titles must be distinct from any
|
5167 |
|
|
other section titles.
|
5168 |
|
|
|
5169 |
|
|
You may add a section Entitled "Endorsements", provided it contains
|
5170 |
|
|
nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various
|
5171 |
|
|
parties--for example, statements of peer review or that the text
|
5172 |
|
|
has been approved by an organization as the authoritative
|
5173 |
|
|
definition of a standard.
|
5174 |
|
|
|
5175 |
|
|
You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text,
|
5176 |
|
|
and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end
|
5177 |
|
|
of the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version. Only one
|
5178 |
|
|
passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be
|
5179 |
|
|
added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the
|
5180 |
|
|
Document already includes a cover text for the same cover,
|
5181 |
|
|
previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity
|
5182 |
|
|
you are acting on behalf of, you may not add another; but you may
|
5183 |
|
|
replace the old one, on explicit permission from the previous
|
5184 |
|
|
publisher that added the old one.
|
5185 |
|
|
|
5186 |
|
|
The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this
|
5187 |
|
|
License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to
|
5188 |
|
|
assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version.
|
5189 |
|
|
|
5190 |
|
|
5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS
|
5191 |
|
|
|
5192 |
|
|
You may combine the Document with other documents released under
|
5193 |
|
|
this License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for
|
5194 |
|
|
modified versions, provided that you include in the combination
|
5195 |
|
|
all of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents,
|
5196 |
|
|
unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your
|
5197 |
|
|
combined work in its license notice, and that you preserve all
|
5198 |
|
|
their Warranty Disclaimers.
|
5199 |
|
|
|
5200 |
|
|
The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and
|
5201 |
|
|
multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single
|
5202 |
|
|
copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name
|
5203 |
|
|
but different contents, make the title of each such section unique
|
5204 |
|
|
by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the
|
5205 |
|
|
original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a
|
5206 |
|
|
unique number. Make the same adjustment to the section titles in
|
5207 |
|
|
the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the
|
5208 |
|
|
combined work.
|
5209 |
|
|
|
5210 |
|
|
In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled
|
5211 |
|
|
"History" in the various original documents, forming one section
|
5212 |
|
|
Entitled "History"; likewise combine any sections Entitled
|
5213 |
|
|
"Acknowledgements", and any sections Entitled "Dedications". You
|
5214 |
|
|
must delete all sections Entitled "Endorsements."
|
5215 |
|
|
|
5216 |
|
|
6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS
|
5217 |
|
|
|
5218 |
|
|
You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other
|
5219 |
|
|
documents released under this License, and replace the individual
|
5220 |
|
|
copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy
|
5221 |
|
|
that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the
|
5222 |
|
|
rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the
|
5223 |
|
|
documents in all other respects.
|
5224 |
|
|
|
5225 |
|
|
You may extract a single document from such a collection, and
|
5226 |
|
|
distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert
|
5227 |
|
|
a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow
|
5228 |
|
|
this License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of
|
5229 |
|
|
that document.
|
5230 |
|
|
|
5231 |
|
|
7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS
|
5232 |
|
|
|
5233 |
|
|
A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other
|
5234 |
|
|
separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of
|
5235 |
|
|
a storage or distribution medium, is called an "aggregate" if the
|
5236 |
|
|
copyright resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the
|
5237 |
|
|
legal rights of the compilation's users beyond what the individual
|
5238 |
|
|
works permit. When the Document is included in an aggregate, this
|
5239 |
|
|
License does not apply to the other works in the aggregate which
|
5240 |
|
|
are not themselves derivative works of the Document.
|
5241 |
|
|
|
5242 |
|
|
If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these
|
5243 |
|
|
copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half
|
5244 |
|
|
of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be placed
|
5245 |
|
|
on covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the
|
5246 |
|
|
electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic
|
5247 |
|
|
form. Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket
|
5248 |
|
|
the whole aggregate.
|
5249 |
|
|
|
5250 |
|
|
8. TRANSLATION
|
5251 |
|
|
|
5252 |
|
|
Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may
|
5253 |
|
|
distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section
|
5254 |
|
|
4. Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special
|
5255 |
|
|
permission from their copyright holders, but you may include
|
5256 |
|
|
translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the
|
5257 |
|
|
original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a
|
5258 |
|
|
translation of this License, and all the license notices in the
|
5259 |
|
|
Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, provided that you also
|
5260 |
|
|
include the original English version of this License and the
|
5261 |
|
|
original versions of those notices and disclaimers. In case of a
|
5262 |
|
|
disagreement between the translation and the original version of
|
5263 |
|
|
this License or a notice or disclaimer, the original version will
|
5264 |
|
|
prevail.
|
5265 |
|
|
|
5266 |
|
|
If a section in the Document is Entitled "Acknowledgements",
|
5267 |
|
|
"Dedications", or "History", the requirement (section 4) to
|
5268 |
|
|
Preserve its Title (section 1) will typically require changing the
|
5269 |
|
|
actual title.
|
5270 |
|
|
|
5271 |
|
|
9. TERMINATION
|
5272 |
|
|
|
5273 |
|
|
You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document
|
5274 |
|
|
except as expressly provided for under this License. Any other
|
5275 |
|
|
attempt to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is
|
5276 |
|
|
void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this
|
5277 |
|
|
License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights,
|
5278 |
|
|
from you under this License will not have their licenses
|
5279 |
|
|
terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
|
5280 |
|
|
|
5281 |
|
|
10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE
|
5282 |
|
|
|
5283 |
|
|
The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of
|
5284 |
|
|
the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new
|
5285 |
|
|
versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
|
5286 |
|
|
differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. See
|
5287 |
|
|
`http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/'.
|
5288 |
|
|
|
5289 |
|
|
Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version
|
5290 |
|
|
number. If the Document specifies that a particular numbered
|
5291 |
|
|
version of this License "or any later version" applies to it, you
|
5292 |
|
|
have the option of following the terms and conditions either of
|
5293 |
|
|
that specified version or of any later version that has been
|
5294 |
|
|
published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If
|
5295 |
|
|
the Document does not specify a version number of this License,
|
5296 |
|
|
you may choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the
|
5297 |
|
|
Free Software Foundation.
|
5298 |
|
|
|
5299 |
|
|
ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents
|
5300 |
|
|
====================================================
|
5301 |
|
|
|
5302 |
|
|
To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of
|
5303 |
|
|
the License in the document and put the following copyright and license
|
5304 |
|
|
notices just after the title page:
|
5305 |
|
|
|
5306 |
|
|
Copyright (C) YEAR YOUR NAME.
|
5307 |
|
|
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
|
5308 |
|
|
under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.2
|
5309 |
|
|
or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
|
5310 |
|
|
with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover
|
5311 |
|
|
Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU
|
5312 |
|
|
Free Documentation License''.
|
5313 |
|
|
|
5314 |
|
|
If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover
|
5315 |
|
|
Texts, replace the "with...Texts." line with this:
|
5316 |
|
|
|
5317 |
|
|
with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with
|
5318 |
|
|
the Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts
|
5319 |
|
|
being LIST.
|
5320 |
|
|
|
5321 |
|
|
If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts, or some other
|
5322 |
|
|
combination of the three, merge those two alternatives to suit the
|
5323 |
|
|
situation.
|
5324 |
|
|
|
5325 |
|
|
If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we
|
5326 |
|
|
recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of
|
5327 |
|
|
free software license, such as the GNU General Public License, to
|
5328 |
|
|
permit their use in free software.
|
5329 |
|
|
|
5330 |
|
|
|
5331 |
|
|
File: standards.info, Node: Index, Prev: GNU Free Documentation License, Up: Top
|
5332 |
|
|
|
5333 |
|
|
Index
|
5334 |
|
|
*****
|
5335 |
|
|
|
5336 |
|
|
|
5337 |
|
|
* Menu:
|
5338 |
|
|
|
5339 |
|
|
* #endif, commenting: Comments. (line 60)
|
5340 |
|
|
* --help output: --help. (line 6)
|
5341 |
|
|
* --version output: --version. (line 6)
|
5342 |
|
|
* -Wall compiler option: Syntactic Conventions.
|
5343 |
|
|
(line 10)
|
5344 |
|
|
* accepting contributions: Contributions. (line 6)
|
5345 |
|
|
* address for bug reports: --help. (line 11)
|
5346 |
|
|
* ANSI C standard: Standard C. (line 6)
|
5347 |
|
|
* arbitrary limits on data: Semantics. (line 6)
|
5348 |
|
|
* ASCII characters: Character Set. (line 6)
|
5349 |
|
|
* autoconf: System Portability. (line 23)
|
5350 |
|
|
* avoiding proprietary code: Reading Non-Free Code.
|
5351 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
5352 |
|
|
* behavior, dependent on program's name: User Interfaces. (line 6)
|
5353 |
|
|
* binary packages: Install Command Categories.
|
5354 |
|
|
(line 80)
|
5355 |
|
|
* bindir: Directory Variables. (line 54)
|
5356 |
|
|
* braces, in C source: Formatting. (line 6)
|
5357 |
|
|
* bug reports: --help. (line 11)
|
5358 |
|
|
* canonical name of a program: --version. (line 12)
|
5359 |
|
|
* casting pointers to integers: CPU Portability. (line 90)
|
5360 |
|
|
* CGI programs, standard options for: Command-Line Interfaces.
|
5361 |
|
|
(line 31)
|
5362 |
|
|
* change logs: Change Logs. (line 6)
|
5363 |
|
|
* change logs, conditional changes: Conditional Changes. (line 6)
|
5364 |
|
|
* change logs, style: Style of Change Logs.
|
5365 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
5366 |
|
|
* character set: Character Set. (line 6)
|
5367 |
|
|
* command-line arguments, decoding: Semantics. (line 46)
|
5368 |
|
|
* command-line interface: Command-Line Interfaces.
|
5369 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
5370 |
|
|
* commenting: Comments. (line 6)
|
5371 |
|
|
* compatibility with C and POSIX standards: Compatibility. (line 6)
|
5372 |
|
|
* compiler warnings: Syntactic Conventions.
|
5373 |
|
|
(line 10)
|
5374 |
|
|
* conditional changes, and change logs: Conditional Changes. (line 6)
|
5375 |
|
|
* conditionals, comments for: Comments. (line 60)
|
5376 |
|
|
* configure: Configuration. (line 6)
|
5377 |
|
|
* control-L: Formatting. (line 118)
|
5378 |
|
|
* conventions for makefiles: Makefile Conventions.
|
5379 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
5380 |
|
|
* corba: Graphical Interfaces.
|
5381 |
|
|
(line 16)
|
5382 |
|
|
* credits for manuals: Manual Credits. (line 6)
|
5383 |
|
|
* data types, and portability: CPU Portability. (line 6)
|
5384 |
|
|
* declaration for system functions: System Functions. (line 21)
|
5385 |
|
|
* DESTDIR: DESTDIR. (line 6)
|
5386 |
|
|
* documentation: Documentation. (line 6)
|
5387 |
|
|
* doschk: Names. (line 38)
|
5388 |
|
|
* downloading this manual: Preface. (line 17)
|
5389 |
|
|
* encodings: Character Set. (line 6)
|
5390 |
|
|
* error messages: Semantics. (line 19)
|
5391 |
|
|
* error messages, formatting: Errors. (line 6)
|
5392 |
|
|
* exec_prefix: Directory Variables. (line 36)
|
5393 |
|
|
* expressions, splitting: Formatting. (line 81)
|
5394 |
|
|
* FDL, GNU Free Documentation License: GNU Free Documentation License.
|
5395 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
5396 |
|
|
* file usage: File Usage. (line 6)
|
5397 |
|
|
* file-name limitations: Names. (line 38)
|
5398 |
|
|
* formatting error messages: Errors. (line 6)
|
5399 |
|
|
* formatting source code: Formatting. (line 6)
|
5400 |
|
|
* formfeed: Formatting. (line 118)
|
5401 |
|
|
* function argument, declaring: Syntactic Conventions.
|
5402 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
5403 |
|
|
* function prototypes: Standard C. (line 17)
|
5404 |
|
|
* getopt: Command-Line Interfaces.
|
5405 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
5406 |
|
|
* gettext: Internationalization.
|
5407 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
5408 |
|
|
* gnome: Graphical Interfaces.
|
5409 |
|
|
(line 16)
|
5410 |
|
|
* graphical user interface: Graphical Interfaces.
|
5411 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
5412 |
|
|
* grave accent: Quote Characters. (line 6)
|
5413 |
|
|
* gtk+: Graphical Interfaces.
|
5414 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
5415 |
|
|
* GUILE: Source Language. (line 38)
|
5416 |
|
|
* implicit int: Syntactic Conventions.
|
5417 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
5418 |
|
|
* impossible conditions: Semantics. (line 70)
|
5419 |
|
|
* installations, staged: DESTDIR. (line 6)
|
5420 |
|
|
* internationalization: Internationalization.
|
5421 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
5422 |
|
|
* left quote: Quote Characters. (line 6)
|
5423 |
|
|
* legal aspects: Legal Issues. (line 6)
|
5424 |
|
|
* legal papers: Contributions. (line 6)
|
5425 |
|
|
* libexecdir: Directory Variables. (line 67)
|
5426 |
|
|
* libraries: Libraries. (line 6)
|
5427 |
|
|
* library functions, and portability: System Functions. (line 6)
|
5428 |
|
|
* license for manuals: License for Manuals. (line 6)
|
5429 |
|
|
* lint: Syntactic Conventions.
|
5430 |
|
|
(line 109)
|
5431 |
|
|
* locale-specific quote characters: Quote Characters. (line 6)
|
5432 |
|
|
* long option names: Option Table. (line 6)
|
5433 |
|
|
* long-named options: Command-Line Interfaces.
|
5434 |
|
|
(line 12)
|
5435 |
|
|
* makefile, conventions for: Makefile Conventions.
|
5436 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
5437 |
|
|
* malloc return value: Semantics. (line 25)
|
5438 |
|
|
* man pages: Man Pages. (line 6)
|
5439 |
|
|
* manual structure: Manual Structure Details.
|
5440 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
5441 |
|
|
* memory allocation failure: Semantics. (line 25)
|
5442 |
|
|
* memory usage: Memory Usage. (line 6)
|
5443 |
|
|
* message text, and internationalization: Internationalization.
|
5444 |
|
|
(line 29)
|
5445 |
|
|
* mmap: Mmap. (line 6)
|
5446 |
|
|
* multiple variables in a line: Syntactic Conventions.
|
5447 |
|
|
(line 35)
|
5448 |
|
|
* names of variables, functions, and files: Names. (line 6)
|
5449 |
|
|
* NEWS file: NEWS File. (line 6)
|
5450 |
|
|
* non-ASCII characters: Character Set. (line 6)
|
5451 |
|
|
* non-POSIX systems, and portability: System Portability. (line 32)
|
5452 |
|
|
* non-standard extensions: Using Extensions. (line 6)
|
5453 |
|
|
* NUL characters: Semantics. (line 11)
|
5454 |
|
|
* open brace: Formatting. (line 6)
|
5455 |
|
|
* optional features, configure-time: Configuration. (line 83)
|
5456 |
|
|
* options for compatibility: Compatibility. (line 14)
|
5457 |
|
|
* options, standard command-line: Command-Line Interfaces.
|
5458 |
|
|
(line 31)
|
5459 |
|
|
* output device and program's behavior: User Interfaces. (line 13)
|
5460 |
|
|
* packaging: Releases. (line 6)
|
5461 |
|
|
* PATH_INFO, specifying standard options as: Command-Line Interfaces.
|
5462 |
|
|
(line 31)
|
5463 |
|
|
* portability, and data types: CPU Portability. (line 6)
|
5464 |
|
|
* portability, and library functions: System Functions. (line 6)
|
5465 |
|
|
* portability, between system types: System Portability. (line 6)
|
5466 |
|
|
* POSIX compatibility: Compatibility. (line 6)
|
5467 |
|
|
* POSIXLY_CORRECT, environment variable: Compatibility. (line 21)
|
5468 |
|
|
* post-installation commands: Install Command Categories.
|
5469 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
5470 |
|
|
* pre-installation commands: Install Command Categories.
|
5471 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
5472 |
|
|
* prefix: Directory Variables. (line 26)
|
5473 |
|
|
* program configuration: Configuration. (line 6)
|
5474 |
|
|
* program design: Design Advice. (line 6)
|
5475 |
|
|
* program name and its behavior: User Interfaces. (line 6)
|
5476 |
|
|
* program's canonical name: --version. (line 12)
|
5477 |
|
|
* programming languages: Source Language. (line 6)
|
5478 |
|
|
* proprietary programs: Reading Non-Free Code.
|
5479 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
5480 |
|
|
* quote characters: Quote Characters. (line 6)
|
5481 |
|
|
* README file: Releases. (line 21)
|
5482 |
|
|
* references to non-free material: References. (line 6)
|
5483 |
|
|
* releasing: Managing Releases. (line 6)
|
5484 |
|
|
* sbindir: Directory Variables. (line 60)
|
5485 |
|
|
* signal handling: Semantics. (line 59)
|
5486 |
|
|
* spaces before open-paren: Formatting. (line 75)
|
5487 |
|
|
* staged installs: DESTDIR. (line 6)
|
5488 |
|
|
* standard command-line options: Command-Line Interfaces.
|
5489 |
|
|
(line 31)
|
5490 |
|
|
* standards for makefiles: Makefile Conventions.
|
5491 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
5492 |
|
|
* string library functions: System Functions. (line 55)
|
5493 |
|
|
* syntactic conventions: Syntactic Conventions.
|
5494 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
5495 |
|
|
* table of long options: Option Table. (line 6)
|
5496 |
|
|
* temporary files: Semantics. (line 84)
|
5497 |
|
|
* temporary variables: Syntactic Conventions.
|
5498 |
|
|
(line 23)
|
5499 |
|
|
* texinfo.tex, in a distribution: Releases. (line 70)
|
5500 |
|
|
|
5501 |
|
|
|
5502 |
|
|
* where to obtain standards.texi: Preface. (line 17)
|
5503 |
|
|
|
5504 |
|
|
|
5505 |
|
|
|
5506 |
|
|
Tag Table:
|
5507 |
|
|
Node: Top804
|
5508 |
|
|
Node: Preface2060
|
5509 |
|
|
Node: Legal Issues4175
|
5510 |
|
|
Node: Reading Non-Free Code4645
|
5511 |
|
|
Node: Contributions6375
|
5512 |
|
|
Node: Trademarks8613
|
5513 |
|
|
Node: Design Advice10248
|
5514 |
|
|
Node: Source Language10840
|
5515 |
|
|
Node: Compatibility12852
|
5516 |
|
|
Node: Using Extensions14480
|
5517 |
|
|
Node: Standard C16056
|
5518 |
|
|
Node: Conditional Compilation18459
|
5519 |
|
|
Node: Program Behavior19857
|
5520 |
|
|
Node: Non-GNU Standards20913
|
5521 |
|
|
Node: Semantics23194
|
5522 |
|
|
Node: Libraries27913
|
5523 |
|
|
Node: Errors29158
|
5524 |
|
|
Node: User Interfaces31651
|
5525 |
|
|
Node: Graphical Interfaces33256
|
5526 |
|
|
Node: Command-Line Interfaces34292
|
5527 |
|
|
Node: --version36324
|
5528 |
|
|
Node: --help42217
|
5529 |
|
|
Node: Option Table42771
|
5530 |
|
|
Node: Memory Usage57712
|
5531 |
|
|
Node: File Usage58743
|
5532 |
|
|
Node: Writing C59493
|
5533 |
|
|
Node: Formatting60465
|
5534 |
|
|
Node: Comments64754
|
5535 |
|
|
Node: Syntactic Conventions68306
|
5536 |
|
|
Node: Names71768
|
5537 |
|
|
Node: System Portability73980
|
5538 |
|
|
Node: CPU Portability76870
|
5539 |
|
|
Node: System Functions80782
|
5540 |
|
|
Node: Internationalization85979
|
5541 |
|
|
Node: Character Set89973
|
5542 |
|
|
Node: Quote Characters90786
|
5543 |
|
|
Node: Mmap92306
|
5544 |
|
|
Node: Documentation93014
|
5545 |
|
|
Node: GNU Manuals94120
|
5546 |
|
|
Node: Doc Strings and Manuals99858
|
5547 |
|
|
Node: Manual Structure Details101411
|
5548 |
|
|
Node: License for Manuals102829
|
5549 |
|
|
Node: Manual Credits103803
|
5550 |
|
|
Node: Printed Manuals104196
|
5551 |
|
|
Node: NEWS File104882
|
5552 |
|
|
Node: Change Logs105560
|
5553 |
|
|
Node: Change Log Concepts106314
|
5554 |
|
|
Node: Style of Change Logs108403
|
5555 |
|
|
Node: Simple Changes110903
|
5556 |
|
|
Node: Conditional Changes112345
|
5557 |
|
|
Node: Indicating the Part Changed113767
|
5558 |
|
|
Node: Man Pages114294
|
5559 |
|
|
Node: Reading other Manuals116606
|
5560 |
|
|
Node: Managing Releases117397
|
5561 |
|
|
Node: Configuration118178
|
5562 |
|
|
Node: Makefile Conventions125898
|
5563 |
|
|
Node: Makefile Basics126780
|
5564 |
|
|
Node: Utilities in Makefiles129954
|
5565 |
|
|
Node: Command Variables132099
|
5566 |
|
|
Node: DESTDIR135321
|
5567 |
|
|
Node: Directory Variables137470
|
5568 |
|
|
Node: Standard Targets151963
|
5569 |
|
|
Ref: Standard Targets-Footnote-1165478
|
5570 |
|
|
Node: Install Command Categories165578
|
5571 |
|
|
Node: Releases170111
|
5572 |
|
|
Node: References174038
|
5573 |
|
|
Node: GNU Free Documentation License179533
|